https://wiki.ica-atom.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Jablko&feedformat=atomICA-AtoM - User contributions [en]2024-03-29T13:59:56ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.35.4https://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.1&diff=9842Release 1.12010-09-21T19:41:06Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>* Upgrade to symfony 1.4<br />
* [[qubit:EAC|EAC]] import and export, issue 137<br />
* [[qubit:SKOS|SKOS]] import and export<br />
* Improved right to left script support<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.1&diff=9841Release 1.12010-09-20T17:15:20Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>* Upgrade to symfony 1.4<br />
* [[qubit:EAC|EAC]] import and export<br />
* [[qubit:SKOS|SKOS]] import and export<br />
* Improved right to left script support<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.1&diff=9839Release 1.12010-08-25T16:20:23Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>* Upgrade to symfony 1.4<br />
* [[qubit:EAC|EAC]] import and export<br />
* [[qubit:SKOS|SKOS]] import and export<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.1&diff=9838Release 1.12010-08-25T16:20:00Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>* Upgrade to symfony 1.4<br />
* [[qubit:EAC]] import and export<br />
* [[qubit:SKOS]] import and export<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.0.9-beta&diff=9837Release 1.0.9-beta2010-08-25T16:18:12Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>Released May 17th, 2010<br />
<br />
Release 1.0.9-beta includes a complete overhaul of the HTML and CSS design including a new and improved default theme (Caribou) and printer friendly CSS. It also features a expanded access control module allowing tighter security controls, support for ICA-ISDF functions, the ability to duplicate existing descriptions, standards compliance validation, and a large number of usability and performance improvements.<br />
<br />
<br />
== New features ==<br />
<br />
* Support for [http://www.ica.org/en/node/38665 ICA-ISDF] function descriptions<br />
* [[qubit:Validation|Validation]] notices report on compliance with metadata standards when editing archival descriptions and authority records, issue 129<br />
* Expanded [[qubit:Access control#Minimum requirements for release 1.0.9|access control]]<br />
** Access control for authority records, taxonomies and digital objects<br />
** Limit translation ability by language<br />
** Switched to [http://zendframework.com/manual/en/zend.acl.html Zend ACL] library for improved performance, security, stability, and maintainability<br />
** Improved user interface<br />
* Duplicate archival descriptions feature to simplify repetitive data entry, issue 411<br />
* Move action for archival descriptions allow moving the current description and descendants to any part of the archival description hierarchy (not limited to current collection or fonds), fixes issue 1042<br />
* Specialize CSS for [[qubit:Print|print]] media makes printouts look good, issue 76<br />
* Cleaner HTML markup and CSS [[qubit:stylesheets|stylesheets]] for easier theming and better cross browser compatibility<br />
** HTML tables no longer used for presentation, now only used for tabular data, issue 61<br />
** Headings now marked up with HTML &lt;h1&gt;, &lt;h2&gt;, &lt;h3&gt;, etc. heading tags<br />
* New default theme (Caribou)<br />
** Move search and browse to a full width header<br />
** Drop down menus in main menu to make better use of horizontal space, issue 1309<br />
* [[qubit:watermark|Watermarking]] for reference images, issue 1320<br />
* Allow linking to digital objects from the Internet via URL (HTTP), issue 344<br />
* Implemented a [[qubit:Dublin Core|Dublin Core application profile]] to improve import/export roundtripping<br />
* Comprehensive [[qubit:Functional testing|functional testing]] procedure documentation<br />
<br />
<br />
== Enhancements ==<br />
<br />
* Performance improvements<br />
** Improved performance of tree view for ISAD (issue 1303) and thesauri (issue 1520)<br />
** Improved performance of digital object "image flow" preview, issue 1131<br />
** Improved performance of physical storage component, issue 652<br />
** Improved performance of publication status updates, issue 1323<br />
** Improved performance loading edit ISAD form, issue 1066<br />
* Improvements to user interface for more efficient data entry and browsing<br />
** [[qubit:Usability_review#Browse_option_select_method|Single-click browse]] menu, configurable by administrator<br />
** [[qubit:Object_landing_pages#Adding_a_record|Single-click addition]] of new archival descriptions, authority records, archival institutions, functions and terms<br />
** Sort browse pages by recent updates, provide alphabetic sorting as a second option<br />
** [[qubit:Usability_review#Upload_page|Separate form]] for importing multiple digital objects<br />
* Added reference code, dates, and level of description to search results and browse pages, issue 1135<br />
* Added thumbnails to search results and browse pages, issue 1315<br />
* Automatic creation of mp3 reference representations for audio files, issue 1469<br />
* Added links into pager to modify the limit of results per page<br />
* URLs in descriptive content now displayed as hyperlinks, issue 356<br />
* Contact information now marked up with [http://microformats.org/wiki/hcard hCard] microformat, increasing [[qubit:data portability|data portability]]<br />
* Upgraded actor and repository to object oriented symfony forms for more security and reliability. These forms are now consistent with the information object form<br />
* Generalized JavaScript behavior for modal dialogs which is easier to use and improves consistency across all dialogs<br />
* [[qubit:Migrations#Fine grained|Fine grained migrations]]<br />
* [[qubit:Technical architecture#Metadata standard plugins|Metadata standard plugins]]<br />
* Added automated tests for uploading videos, issue 801<br />
* [[qubit:PEAR|PEAR channel]] now managed with Pirum instead of Chiara_PEAR_Server<br />
* Upgraded to [http://groups.google.com/group/qubit-dev/browse_thread/thread/40d8881ab09fcc48 symfony 1.3]<br />
* Allow multiple values for type of archival institution, issue 486<br />
* Implement new auto-complete style for name access points - issue 127, issue 246 & issue 1045<br />
* Add level of description to archival description browse list, issue 230<br />
<br />
<br />
== Internationalization ==<br />
<br />
* New! Korean translation of user interface<br />
* Merged new and improved user interface translations (thank you to our volunteer translators!)<br />
<br />
<br />
== Bug fixes ==<br />
<br />
* Issue 618 - Deleting notes from term edit screen erases other unsaved changes made to term<br />
* Issue 892 - Can't translate code and note fields in taxonomies<br />
* Issue 916 - when editing ISDIAH records, hitting 'enter' on other form of name or parallel form of name bumps names off list<br />
* Issue 949 - users without view draft permissions can navigate to draft descriptions through browse digital objects<br />
* Issue 985 - issue warning when user tries to use wildcard in search with less than 3 characters<br />
* Issue 998 - multi-page files appear in browse results with both parent and child levels<br />
* Issue 1035 - Deleting language of description and script of description closes information div and erases other changes<br />
* Issue 1053 - Multi-file digital object not passing authentication information<br />
* Issue 1075 - Editing or deleting physical storage returns user to the information object edit screen instead of the view screen<br />
* Issue 1100 - Title in cover-flow viewer is covered up by scroll bar if the title is longer than one line<br />
* Issue 1121 - Users without "view draft" permissions can see draft descriptions<br />
* Issue 1122 - Repository holdings list shows draft descriptions<br />
* Issue 1149 - Error importing notes<br />
* Issue 1544 - Users without view draft permissions can see drafts in term browse results<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Release_1.0.9-beta&diff=9836Release 1.0.9-beta2010-08-25T16:17:50Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>Released May 17th, 2010<br />
<br />
Release 1.0.9-beta includes a complete overhaul of the HTML and CSS design including a new and improved default theme (Caribou) and printer friendly CSS. It also features a expanded access control module allowing tighter security controls, support for ICA-ISDF functions, the ability to duplicate existing descriptions, standards compliance validation, and a large number of usability and performance improvements.<br />
<br />
<br />
== New Features ==<br />
<br />
* Support for [http://www.ica.org/en/node/38665 ICA-ISDF] function descriptions<br />
* [[qubit:Validation|Validation]] notices report on compliance with metadata standards when editing archival descriptions and authority records, issue 129<br />
* Expanded [[qubit:Access control#Minimum requirements for release 1.0.9|access control]]<br />
** Access control for authority records, taxonomies and digital objects<br />
** Limit translation ability by language<br />
** Switched to [http://zendframework.com/manual/en/zend.acl.html Zend ACL] library for improved performance, security, stability, and maintainability<br />
** Improved user interface<br />
* Duplicate archival descriptions feature to simplify repetitive data entry, issue 411<br />
* Move action for archival descriptions allow moving the current description and descendants to any part of the archival description hierarchy (not limited to current collection or fonds), fixes issue 1042<br />
* Specialize CSS for [[qubit:Print|print]] media makes printouts look good, issue 76<br />
* Cleaner HTML markup and CSS [[qubit:stylesheets|stylesheets]] for easier theming and better cross browser compatibility<br />
** HTML tables no longer used for presentation, now only used for tabular data, issue 61<br />
** Headings now marked up with HTML &lt;h1&gt;, &lt;h2&gt;, &lt;h3&gt;, etc. heading tags<br />
* New default theme (Caribou)<br />
** Move search and browse to a full width header<br />
** Drop down menus in main menu to make better use of horizontal space, issue 1309<br />
* [[qubit:watermark|Watermarking]] for reference images, issue 1320<br />
* Allow linking to digital objects from the Internet via URL (HTTP), issue 344<br />
* Implemented a [[qubit:Dublin Core|Dublin Core application profile]] to improve import/export roundtripping<br />
* Comprehensive [[qubit:Functional testing|functional testing]] procedure documentation<br />
<br />
<br />
== Enhancements ==<br />
<br />
* Performance improvements<br />
** Improved performance of tree view for ISAD (issue 1303) and thesauri (issue 1520)<br />
** Improved performance of digital object "image flow" preview, issue 1131<br />
** Improved performance of physical storage component, issue 652<br />
** Improved performance of publication status updates, issue 1323<br />
** Improved performance loading edit ISAD form, issue 1066<br />
* Improvements to user interface for more efficient data entry and browsing<br />
** [[qubit:Usability_review#Browse_option_select_method|Single-click browse]] menu, configurable by administrator<br />
** [[qubit:Object_landing_pages#Adding_a_record|Single-click addition]] of new archival descriptions, authority records, archival institutions, functions and terms<br />
** Sort browse pages by recent updates, provide alphabetic sorting as a second option<br />
** [[qubit:Usability_review#Upload_page|Separate form]] for importing multiple digital objects<br />
* Added reference code, dates, and level of description to search results and browse pages, issue 1135<br />
* Added thumbnails to search results and browse pages, issue 1315<br />
* Automatic creation of mp3 reference representations for audio files, issue 1469<br />
* Added links into pager to modify the limit of results per page<br />
* URLs in descriptive content now displayed as hyperlinks, issue 356<br />
* Contact information now marked up with [http://microformats.org/wiki/hcard hCard] microformat, increasing [[qubit:data portability|data portability]]<br />
* Upgraded actor and repository to object oriented symfony forms for more security and reliability. These forms are now consistent with the information object form<br />
* Generalized JavaScript behavior for modal dialogs which is easier to use and improves consistency across all dialogs<br />
* [[qubit:Migrations#Fine grained|Fine grained migrations]]<br />
* [[qubit:Technical architecture#Metadata standard plugins|Metadata standard plugins]]<br />
* Added automated tests for uploading videos, issue 801<br />
* [[qubit:PEAR|PEAR channel]] now managed with Pirum instead of Chiara_PEAR_Server<br />
* Upgraded to [http://groups.google.com/group/qubit-dev/browse_thread/thread/40d8881ab09fcc48 symfony 1.3]<br />
* Allow multiple values for type of archival institution, issue 486<br />
* Implement new auto-complete style for name access points - issue 127, issue 246 & issue 1045<br />
* Add level of description to archival description browse list, issue 230<br />
<br />
<br />
== Internationalization ==<br />
<br />
* New! Korean translation of user interface<br />
* Merged new and improved user interface translations (thank you to our volunteer translators!)<br />
<br />
<br />
== Bug fixes ==<br />
<br />
* Issue 618 - Deleting notes from term edit screen erases other unsaved changes made to term<br />
* Issue 892 - Can't translate code and note fields in taxonomies<br />
* Issue 916 - when editing ISDIAH records, hitting 'enter' on other form of name or parallel form of name bumps names off list<br />
* Issue 949 - users without view draft permissions can navigate to draft descriptions through browse digital objects<br />
* Issue 985 - issue warning when user tries to use wildcard in search with less than 3 characters<br />
* Issue 998 - multi-page files appear in browse results with both parent and child levels<br />
* Issue 1035 - Deleting language of description and script of description closes information div and erases other changes<br />
* Issue 1053 - Multi-file digital object not passing authentication information<br />
* Issue 1075 - Editing or deleting physical storage returns user to the information object edit screen instead of the view screen<br />
* Issue 1100 - Title in cover-flow viewer is covered up by scroll bar if the title is longer than one line<br />
* Issue 1121 - Users without "view draft" permissions can see draft descriptions<br />
* Issue 1122 - Repository holdings list shows draft descriptions<br />
* Issue 1149 - Error importing notes<br />
* Issue 1544 - Users without view draft permissions can see drafts in term browse results<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Releases]]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ICA-AtoM_virtual_appliance&diff=9834ICA-AtoM virtual appliance2010-08-11T19:05:12Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>The virtual appliance allows you to try ICA-AtoM on your personal computer if you don't have access to a webserver on which to install ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
== What is it? ==<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Virtual appliance|virtual appliance]] is one file containing a minimal operating system and server software. You can "play" this file with a free virtual machine player like VMware Player or Sun VirtualBox.<br />
<br />
When you play the virtual appliance, it starts the second operating system and server software inside the player, on top of your existing operating system. There is no need to reboot or install anything except the player. You can then connect to the web server running inside the virtual machine player with your regular web browser.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Minimum hardware requirements ==<br />
<br />
* Processor: Pentium IV or higher<br />
* RAM: 256B unallocated memory<br />
* Hard Drive space: a minimum of 1GB to test the system on a small scale (i.e. use the available test files or import a small set of test files)<br />
<br />
<br />
== vmserver ==<br />
<br />
=== Install Sun Virtual Box ===<br />
<br />
There are VirtualBox versions available for every major operating system.<br />
<br />
Download and install Sun VirtualBox, http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Download vmserver appliance ===<br />
<br />
[http://ica-atom.org/VEbuilds/ica-atom-vmserver-2010-05-16.tgz ica-atom-vmserver-2010-05-16.tgz] ([http://ica-atom.org/VEbuilds/md5sum.list md5])<br />
<br />
Unzip the vmserver appliance. This should result in the following two files appearing in an ubuntu-vmserver folder:<br />
* ubuntu.vmx<br />
* disk0.vmdk<br />
<br />
=== Setup appliance in VirtualBox ===<br />
<br />
==== Add vmserver appliance to VirtualBox ====<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Open the Sun VirtualBox virtual machine.<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:0-new.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click "New"<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:1-Start-vmserver-setup.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click "Next"<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:2-set-name-vmserver-setup.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Enter a Name e.g. "ICA-AtoM"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Set OS type as operating system "Linux" version "Ubuntu"<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
This setting refers to the operating system that is run inside the virtual appliance, not your own host operating system<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Click "Next"<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:3-set-mem-vmserver.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Set Base Memory Size to "256MB"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Click "Next"<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:4-use-existing.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Select Use Existing Hard Disk<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:5-click-folder-icon.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click Folder/Arrow icon for Virtual Media Manager<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:6-virtual-media-manger-add.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click "Add"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Browse to location of disk0.vmdk and click select/Open (ubuntu-vmserver folder)<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:7-select-disk.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Highlight newly added disk and click select<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:8-finish-add-vmserver.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click "Next"<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:9-finish.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Review selections, click "Finish"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM should be visible on the left hand side of VirtualBox<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Right click ICA-AtoM in VirtualBox<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:0-settings.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Choose Settings<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:SelectSystem.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Select System<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:EnablePAE.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Enable PAE/NX checkbox<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:2-selectnetwork.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Select Network<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:3-select-host-only.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Choose "Host-Only Adapter" in "Attached to" drop down<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:5-click.OK.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click OK<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
==== Start the machine ====<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
[[File:0-start.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click Start<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:1-complete-boot.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Wait for boot to complete. You do not need to enter the Ubuntu password (bottom of the boot-up screen)<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:3-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Open your web browser and go to the following URL: http://192.168.56.101/<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Your web browser is now communicating directly with the server inside the virtual appliance, just as if you were pointing your web browser to http://ica-atom.org/ or any other online website<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
You will now complete the basic ICA-AtoM installation steps on the copy of the application running inside the virtual appliance<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:4-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click the 'Continue' link on the System Checks page<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:5-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Don't adjust the default database settings. Accept the default database name ("qubit") and user ("root"). Just press "Save and continue"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Give your new ICA-AtoM site a title and (optional) site description<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Create an administrator account for yourself, completing the mandatory username, email, and password fields<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:6-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Click "Save and continue"<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Congratulations, you have a running copy of ICA-AtoM! See the [[user manual]] for instructions on how to use the software<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Be sure to follow the [[#Turn off virtual appliance|turn off virtual appliance]] instructions below when you are done so that you save any data you have entered and avoid starting a new ICA-AtoM installation<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
The next time you want to use your ICA-AtoM virtual appliance, just open the Sun Virtual Box player, "Start" the ICA-AtoM virtual appliance and point your browser to, http://192.168.56.101/<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
==== Turn off virtual appliance ====<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
[[File:7-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
At the end of your session, turn off the VirtualBox virtual machine by going to Machine > Close<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
[[File:8-ica-atom.png]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Select the "Save the machine state" option<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
If you don't select the "Save the machine state" option you will lose any data you have entered and have to complete the ICA-AtoM installation anew the next time you start the virtual appliance.<br />
<br />
This is from the VirtualBox help manual:<br />
<br />
<blockquote><br />
<br />
3.4.3. Saving the state of the machine<br />
<br />
When you click on the "Close" button of your virtual machine window (at the top right of the window, just like you would close any other window on your system) (or press the Host key together with "Q"), VirtualBox asks you whether you want to "save" or "power off" the VM.<br />
<br />
The difference between these three options is crucial. They mean:<br />
<br />
Save the machine state: With this option, VirtualBox "freezes" the virtual machine by completely saving its state to your local disk. When you later resume the VM (by again clicking the "Start" button in the VirtualBox main window), you will find that the VM continues exactly where it was left off. All your programs will still be open, and your computer resumes operation.<br />
<br />
Saving the state of a virtual machine is thus in some ways similar to suspending a laptop computer (e.g. by closing its lid).<br />
<br />
Send the shutdown signal. This will send an ACPI shutdown signal to the virtual machine, which has the same effect as if you had pressed the power button on a real computer. So long as a fairly modern operating system is installed and running in the VM, this should trigger a proper shutdown mechanism in the VM.<br />
<br />
Power off the machine: With this option, VirtualBox also stops running the virtual machine, but without saving its state.<br />
<br />
This is equivalent to pulling the power plug on a real computer without shutting it down properly. If you start the machine again after powering it off, your operating system will have to reboot completely and may begin a lengthy check of its (virtual) system disks.<br />
<br />
As a result, this should not normally be done, since it can potentially cause data loss or an inconsistent state of the guest system on disk.<br />
<br />
The "Discard" button in the main VirtualBox window discards a virtual machine's saved state. This has the same effect as powering it off, and the same warnings apply.<br />
<br />
</blockquote><br />
<br />
<br />
== KVM ==<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
This section is for Linux users only.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Install KVM ===<br />
<br />
KVM is part of the Linux kernel, check with your distribution for installation methods.<br />
<br />
<br />
==== Debian/Ubuntu ====<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Run the following to check if your processor supports KVM (if nothing is printed you can not use KVM)<br />
<br />
<pre><br />
$ egrep '(vmx|svm)' --color=always /proc/cpuinfo<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Install KVM<br />
<br />
<pre><br />
$ sudo aptitude -DR install qemu-kvm<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Download KVM appliance ===<br />
<br />
[http://ica-atom.org/VEbuilds/ica-atom-kvm-2010-05-16.tgz ica-atom-kvm-2010-05-16.tgz] ([http://ica-atom.org/VEbuilds/md5sum.list md5])<br />
<br />
Unzip the KVM appliance. This should result in the following two files appearing in an ubuntu-kvm folder:<br />
* disk0.qcow2<br />
* run.sh < this file can be modified to preserve settings<br />
<br />
=== Run appliance in KVM ===<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
Change directory to the location of KVM image,<br />
<br />
<pre><br />
$ cd /path/to/image/ubuntu-kvm<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Start KVM appliance instance (-m sets the memory in MB in this case 256MB, -redir tells the host machine to direct port 8000 to 80 on the guest instance)<br />
<br />
<pre><br />
$ sudo kvm -m 256 -redir tcp:8000::80 disk0.qcow2<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
Wait until the machine is completely booted (you will see Ubuntu shell login)<br />
<br />
</li><li><br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM is now reachable at http://localhost:8000/<br />
<br />
</li><br />
<br />
</ol></div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=User_manual&diff=9819User manual2010-07-21T21:50:09Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="width:95%; border="0"<br />
|-valign="top"<br />
| style="width:500px; border: 1px solid rgb(255, 201, 201); padding: 0.5em 1em 1em; color: rgb(0, 0, 0); background-color: rgb(255, 243, 243);" |<br />
<br />
== [[Overview]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[What is ICA-AtoM?]]<br />
* [[Technical requirements]]<br />
* [[Entity types]]<br />
* [[Descriptive standards]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Getting started]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Home page]]<br />
* [[Log in]]<br />
* [[User roles]]<br />
* [[Page types]]<br />
* [[Choose language]]<br />
* [[Change password]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Add/edit content]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Add/edit archival descriptions]]<br />
* [[Add/edit authority records]]<br />
* [[Add/edit archival institutions]]<br />
* [[Add/edit functions]]<br />
* [[Add/edit terms]]<br />
* [[Exit edit mode]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Access content]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Search]]<br />
* [[Browse]]<br />
* [[Navigate]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Translate]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Multilingual design principles]]<br />
* [[Translate content]]<br />
* [[Translate interface]]<br />
* [[Translate static pages]]<br />
<br />
<br />
| style="width: 500px; border: 1px solid rgb(198, 201, 255); padding: 0.5em 1em 1em; color: rgb(0, 0, 0); background-color: rgb(240, 240, 255);" |<br />
<br />
== [[Import/export]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Upload digital objects]]<br />
* [[Import descriptions]]<br />
* [[Export descriptions]]<br />
* [[OAI-PMH]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Administer]] ==<br />
<br />
* [[Install]]<br />
* [[Manage user accounts]]<br />
* [[Edit permissions]]<br />
* [[Manage static pages]]<br />
* [[Settings]]<br />
* [[Themes]]<br />
* [[Default language]]<br />
* [[Back up]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Glossary]] ==<br />
<br />
Glossary of terms used throughout this user manual<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[:Category:User manual|Index]] ==<br />
<br />
Index of pages in this user manual<br />
<br />
<br />
== [[Printable user manual]] ==<br />
<br />
Printable versions of this manual, for easy reference<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
<br />
== Questions? ==<br />
<br />
Please post them to [http://groups.google.ca/group/ica-atom-users the discussion group]<br />
<br />
<br />
__NOEDITSECTION__<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ICA-AtoM_users&diff=9818ICA-AtoM users2010-07-21T17:09:50Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This is a list of notable sites running ICA-AtoM,<br />
<br />
* [http://memorybc.ca/ BC archival union list]<br />
* [http://humanrightsarchives.org/ UNESCO human rights archives]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ICA-AtoM_users&diff=9817ICA-AtoM users2010-07-20T17:33:14Z<p>Jablko: Created page with 'This is a list of sites running ICA-AtoM, * [http://memorybc.ca/ BC archival union list] * [http://humanrightsarchives.org/ UNESCO human rights archives]'</p>
<hr />
<div>This is a list of sites running ICA-AtoM,<br />
<br />
* [http://memorybc.ca/ BC archival union list]<br />
* [http://humanrightsarchives.org/ UNESCO human rights archives]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Wiki_reorganization&diff=9796Wiki reorganization2010-07-11T21:27:49Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>== Footer ==<br />
<br />
* [[qubit:Install]]<br />
* [[User manual]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Virtual appliance ==<br />
<br />
Can these two pages be merged?<br />
<br />
* [[Virtual appliance]]<br />
* [[ICA-AtoM virtual appliance]]<br />
* amos virtual appliance page<br />
<br />
<br />
== Categories ==<br />
<br />
Ability to easily move pages in/out of the [[user manual]] is a "good thing" - hence a [[:Category:User manual]] category is better than a "User manual:" namespace<br />
<br />
<br />
== Glossary ==<br />
<br />
There used to be one wiki page for each glossary term, but this made automatically compiling a consolidated glossary (for, say, a [[printable user manual]]) slooooow<br />
<br />
Now there's a single [[glossary]] wiki page which consolidates all glossary terms<br />
<br />
This wiki syntax can be used to link directly to glossary terms,<br />
<br />
<nowiki>[[Glossary#Example term|example term]]</nowiki><br />
<br />
There are also translations of the glossary. To link to the translation of a term, use this wiki syntax,<br />
<br />
<nowiki>[[Glossary/ex#Example translation|example translation]]</nowiki><br />
<br />
^ where "ex" is a language code and "Example translation" is the translation of the glossary term<br />
<br />
When the consolidated glossary page and the consolidated translations were created, the text of the individual wiki pages and individual translations were merged, so no content or translations were lost<br />
<br />
<br />
== TODO ==<br />
<br />
* Checkout [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:$wgAllowDisplayTitle DISPLAYTITLE]<br />
* Should we add a link from [[Main Page]] (documentation) to the installation instructions? That's not easy enough to find, I think. Should go in the site footer also, I think<br />
* When you click "download" in the header, it doesn't mention the virtual appliance</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Delete_a_term&diff=9757Delete a term2010-06-30T02:58:18Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit terms]] > Delete a term<br />
<br />
# Click "Taxonomies" in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.<br />
# Click on a [[Glossary#Term|term]] to go to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for the [[Glossary#Term|term]].<br />
# Click the "Delete" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] (locked terms cannot be deleted).<br />
# ICA-AtoM prompts you to confirm the delete request; click "OK".<br />
# ICA-AtoM deletes the record and returns you to a page listing all remaining top-level [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Deleting a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from a [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] will delete the [[Glossary#Term|term]] from associated [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], and [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Edit_a_term&diff=9756Edit a term2010-06-30T02:57:03Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit terms]] > Edit a term<br />
<br />
# Click "Taxonomies" in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] to go to a list of [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] terms list page showing all existing [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
# Click the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] you want to edit to expand it and view the [[Glossary#Term|terms]] associated with it.<br />
# Click on a [[Glossary#Term|term]] to go to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for the [[Glossary#Term|term]].<br />
# Click the "Edit" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] or click on the [[Glossary#Title bar|title bar]] to edit open the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.<br />
# See [[Term data entry]] for detailed explanations and notes on [[Glossary#Field|fields]].<br />
# You can quit the cancel the process at any time by clicking the "Cancel" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created.<br />
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|"Create" button]] to save the new record.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_a_new_authority_record&diff=9755Add a new authority record2010-06-30T02:53:19Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit authority records]] > Create a new authority record<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== From the main menu ==<br />
<br />
# [[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add a new authority record from the main menu]]In the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]], hover your cursor over "Add" and select "Authority records". Alternatively, navigate to a [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]] and click the [[Glossary#Add new button|"Add new" button]] in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. ICA-AtoM takes you to a blank [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.<br />
# [[Image:editIsaar.png|500px|right|thumb|Save or cancel the new record]]On loading, the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] displays the record with all [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]] closed; click on an [[Glossary#Information area|information area]] to access the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] grouped under it.<br />
# You can quit the process at any time by clicking the "cancel" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]; no new record will be added.<br />
# Click the [[Glossary#Create button|create button]] in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] to save the new record.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== From a related ISAD(G) archival description (Name of creator field) ==<br />
<br />
In the Name of creator [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the ISAD [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]], type in a new name. The name will be saved as a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] when you save the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== From a related RAD, Dublin Core or MODS archival description (Actor name field) ==<br />
<br />
# [[Image:dcEvent2.png|500px|right|thumb|A new actor name added to the event dialogue box creates a new authority record (RAD, Dublin Core, MODS templates only)]]In an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]], add a new [[Glossary#Event|event]]. In the Actor name field, type in a new name. When you save the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], ICA-AtoM creates a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] for the name.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== From a related ISAD(G) or RAD archival description (Name access point) ==<br />
<br />
Type a new name into a Name [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] [[Glossary#Field|field]]. When you save the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] record, ICA-AtoM creates a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] for the name.<br />
<br />
<br />
== From an authority record view page ==<br />
<br />
Click the [[Glossary#Add new button|Add new button]] in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]] of an [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. This will open a blank [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add/edit_content&diff=9754Add/edit content2010-06-30T02:26:52Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > Add/edit content<br />
<br />
<br />
This section describes how to add, edit, and delete content in ICA-AtoM:<br />
* [[Add/edit archival descriptions]]<br />
* [[Add/edit authority records]]<br />
* [[Add/edit archival institutions]]<br />
* [[Add/edit functions]]<br />
* [[Control area]]<br />
* [[Add/edit terms]]<br />
* [[Exit edit mode]]<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The procedures all assume that you are authenticated and that your [[Glossary#User account|user account]] has sufficient [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]] for the actions described.<br />
* [[Glossary#Contributor|Contributors]] can create and edit descriptions<br />
* [[Glossary#Editor|Editors]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] can in addition publish and delete descriptions<br />
See [[user roles]] for more information on the different [[Glossary#User role|user roles]] in ICA-AtoM. Note that in a [[Glossary#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]], a user's edit and delete access may be limited to records originating from his or her own institution.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
There is no requirement to create records in any particular order. But when an institution or [[Glossary#Network|network]] installs ICA-AtoM application, the first record(s) that should be created are always the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records for all the repositories that will contribute descriptions to the system. These institutions will then appear in the drop-down list in the "Repository" [[Glossary#Field|field]] when creating [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=UM-3.1.6.1&diff=9751UM-3.1.6.12010-06-29T22:33:02Z<p>Jablko: moved UM-3.1.6.1 to Add new event</p>
<hr />
<div>#REDIRECT [[Add new event]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Add_new_event&diff=9750Add new event2010-06-29T22:33:02Z<p>Jablko: moved UM-3.1.6.1 to Add new event</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
<span class="pageTitle">Add new event</span><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-3|UM-3 Add / edit content]] > [[UM-3.1|UM-3.1 Add / edit archival descriptions]] > [[UM-3.1.6|UM-3.1.6 MODS elements]] > UM-3.1.6.1 Add new event<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-3.1.6.1_1.png|500px|right|thumb|Click blue link to add new event]]<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-3.1.6.1_2.png|500px|right|thumb|''Add new event'' dialogue box]]<br />
<br />
<br />
1. Add new event<br />
*The ''add new event'' dialogue box is used to enter the name of the creator, publisher or contributor and the date(s) of creation, publication or contribution.<br />
*Click the add new link under ''Name''. A dialogue box will open up for data entry and the rest of the screen will go grey.<br />
<br />
<br />
2. '''name'''<br />
*Select a name from the [[drop-down menu]]. The values in this list are drawn from [[authority record|authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
3. '''or add new name'''<br />
*If the name you want does not appear in the [[drop-down menu]] under '''Name''', you can create a new name in this [[field]]. This automatically creates a new [[authority record]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''event type'''<br />
*Select an event type from the [[drop-down menu]] (for example, creation, contribution, publication, broadcasting, reproduction, etc.). The values in this list are drawn from the Event types [[taxonomy]].<br />
*If a lower level of description has the same creator, contributor or publisher etc. as its [[parent record]] leave this [[field]] blank. The value will be inherited from the [[parent record]].<br />
<br />
<br />
3. '''date'''<br />
<br />
*Year / end year:<br />
**Enter the opening and closing years of the date range.<br />
**ICA-AtoM uses these values for sorting and searching purposes.<br />
**Use only four-digit numbers.<br />
**If the start and end years are the same, enter only the ''year'' and leave the ''end year'' blank.<br />
**Complete at lower [[Level of description|levels of description]] even if you are leaving the ''event type'' field blank (e.g. when describing an item, you do not need to repeat the ''creator name'' from the [[collection]] description, but you do need to enter the date a date for the item).<br />
*Date display<br />
**Enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[view mode]].<br />
**Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. 1997-07-16).<br />
**Whereas ''year'' and ''end year'' are used internally for database searching and sorting purposes, this [[field]] is for display purposes.<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''place'''<br />
*If desired, select a place from the [[drop-down menu]]. The places on this list are derived from the Places [[taxonomy]].<br />
<br />
<br />
5. submit<br />
*Click submit. You will be returned to the original screen. To add other [[event|events]], repeat the process as often as needed. Note that you '''must''' save the record before leaving the [[edit screen]] or you will lose all of the data you have just entered.</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAD&diff=9649ISAD2010-06-24T15:56:44Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] > ISAD<br />
<br />
<br />
== Identity area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit archival description: identity area. Note asterisks next to mandatory fields]]<br />
<br />
The "identity area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "essential information ... to identify the unit of description" ([[RS-1#i.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Reference code ===<br />
<br />
For unique identification, the reference code may contain any or all of the following elements:<br />
* the country code in accordance with the latest version of ISO 3166, Codes for the representation of names of countries<br />
* the repository code in accordance with the national repository code standard or other unique location identifier<br />
* a specific local reference code, control number, or other unique identifier<br />
<br />
All three elements must be present for the purpose of information exchange at the international level. ([[RS-1#3.1.1|ISAD 3.1.1]])<br />
<br />
A country code and repository code will automatically be included in the reference code whenever the highest-level [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] is linked to an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] (see [[#Context area|context area]]). The [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] description must have the following [[Glossary#Field|fields]] filled out in order for this to happen: the "Identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH identity area]] and the "country" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH contact area]].<br />
<br />
Information entered into the "identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] at lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]] will appear as part of the reference code when the archival description is saved and displayed.<br />
<br />
Each [[Glossary#Child record|child]] archival description will inherit reference code data entered at the [[Glossary#Parent record|parent]] [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The reference code '''will not be displayed''' in either the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for any description that does not have its own identifier.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title ===<br />
<br />
<blockquote><br />
<br />
<p>Provide either a formal title or a concise supplied title in accordance with the rules of multilevel description and national conventions. If appropriate, abridge a long formal title, but only if this can be done without loss of essential information.<br />
<br />
<p>For supplied titles, at the higher level, include the name of the creator of the records. At lower levels one may include, for example, the name of the author of the document and a term indicating the form of the material comprising the unit of description and, where appropriate, a phrase reflecting function, activity, subject, location, or theme.<br />
<br />
<p>Distinguish between formal and supplied titles according to national or language conventions.<br />
<br />
</blockquote><br />
<br />
For rules and conventions, see [[RS-1#3.1.2|ISAD 3.1.2]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date(s) ===<br />
<br />
Select an [[Glossary#Event|event]] type (either creation or accumulation).<br />
<br />
Enter a four-digit start year and a four-digit end year. The end year [[Glossary#Field|field]] can be left blank if further accruals are expected, if it is unknown, or if it is the same as the start year.<br />
<br />
Enter a date display if it is different from the start and end year. For example, if start year is 1927 and end year is 1944, the default display will be "1927-1944" unless you use the date display [[Glossary#Field|field]] to display, for example, "June 1927 - [ca. 1944]".<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
You can add as many sets of dates as required. For example, an item might separate dates for creation, publication and reproduction.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[RS-1#3.1.3|ISAD 3.1.3]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Level of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record the level of this unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.1.4|ISAD 3.1.4]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a default [[Glossary#Value list|value list]] of [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]]; this can customized by [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Add new child levels ===<br />
<br />
See [[add a new archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Extent and medium ===<br />
<br />
Record the extent of the unit of description by giving the number of physical or logical units in arabic numerals and the unit of measurement. Give the specific medium (media) of the unit of description. Alternatively, give the linear shelf space or cubic storage space of the unit of description. ([[RS-1#3.1.5|ISAD 3.1.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Context area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: context area]]<br />
<br />
The "context area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "information about the origin and custody of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name of creator(s) ===<br />
<br />
Click on the "Name of creator(s)" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a name from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the name does not appear on this list, you can type it in and a new authority record will be created.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
When the record is saved, the administrative history of the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] appears in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. This information is pulled in from the creator's [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. To edit this information you will need to edit the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Repository ===<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Select a repository only at the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]]; leave this field blank at the lower levels if they are held by the same repository (see [[RS-1#2.4|ISAD 2.4 Non-Repetition of Information]]). It is important to remember this because if a repository is selected for the lower levels then these lower levels will all be displayed in the [[Glossary#Holdings|holdings]] area of an archival institution's [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
Click on the "Repository" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] that holds the archival material being described. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the repository does not appear in this list, you can type it in and a new repository record will be created.<br />
<br />
=== Archival history ===<br />
<br />
"Record the successive transfers of ownership, responsibility and/or custody of the unit of description and indicate those actions, such as history of the arrangement, production of contemporary finding aids, re-use of the records for other purposes or software migrations, that have contributed to its present structure and arrangement. Give the dates of these actions, insofar as they can be ascertained. If the archival history is unknown, record that information. Optionally, when the unit of description is acquired directly from the creator, do not record an archival history but rather, record this information as the "immediate source of acquisition"." ([[RS-1#3.2.3|ISAD 3.2.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Immediate source of acquisition or transfer ===<br />
<br />
"Record the source from which the unit of description was acquired and the date and/or method of acquisition if any or all of this information is not confidential. If the source is unknown, record that information. Optionally, add accession numbers or codes." ([[RS-1#3.2.4|ISAD 3.2.4]])<br />
<br />
== Content and structure area ==<br />
<br />
The "content and structure" area contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the subject matter and arrangement of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Scope and content ===<br />
<br />
"Give a summary of the scope (such as time periods and geographical location) and content, (such as documentary forms, subject matter and administrative processes) of the records, appropriate to the level of description." ([[RS-1#3.3.1|ISAD 3.3.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Appraisal, destruction and scheduling information ===<br />
<br />
"Record appraisal, destruction and scheduling actions taken on or planned for the records, especially if they may affect the interpretation of the material. Where appropriate, record the authority for the action." ([[RS-1#3.3.2|ISAD 3.3.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Accruals ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate if accruals are expected. Where appropriate, give an estimate of their quantity and frequency." ([[RS-1#3.3.3|ISAD 3.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== System of arrangement ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the internal structure, order and/or the system of classification of the unit of description. Note how these have been treated by the archivist. For electronic records, record or reference information on system design. Alternatively, include any of this information in the ''scope and content'' element ([[RS-1#3.3.1|3.3.1]]) according to national conventions." ([[RS-1#3.3.4|ISAD 3.3.4]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Conditions of access and use area ==<br />
<br />
The "conditions of access and use area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the availability of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing access ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the law or legal status, contract, regulation or policy that affects access to the unit of description. Indicate the extent of the period of closure and the date at which the material will open when appropriate." ([[RS-1#3.4.1|ISAD 3.4.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing reproduction ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about conditions, such as copyright, governing the reproduction of the unit of description after access has been provided. If the existence of such conditions is unknown, record this. If there are no conditions, no statement is necessary." ([[RS-1#3.4.2|ISAD 3.4.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Language of material and script of material ===<br />
<br />
"Record the language(s) and/or script(s) of the materials comprising the unit of description. Note any distinctive alphabets, scripts, symbol systems or abbreviations employed. Optionally, also include the appropriate ISO codes for language(s) (ISO 639-1 and ISO 639-2: International Standards for Language Codes) or script(s), (ISO 15924: International Standard for Names of Scripts)." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this ISAD [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as two separate [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], each with [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]]. The [[Glossary#Value list|value lists]] are based on the ISO standards and cannot be edited. Click on the desired field and select the language or script from the drop-down menu; to narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language or script. Note that there is no limit to the number of languages or scripts you can add.<br />
<br />
To record a narrative note relating to either [[Glossary#Field|field]], use the [[#Notes area|notes area]].<br />
<br />
=== Physical characteristics ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate any important physical conditions, such as preservation requirements, that affect the use of the unit of description. Note any software and/or hardware required to access the unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Finding aids ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about any finding aids that the repository or records creator may have that provide information relating to the context and contents of the unit of description. If appropriate, include information on where to obtain a copy." ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Allied materials area ==<br />
<br />
The "allied materials area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about materials having an important relationship to the unit of description)" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of originals ===<br />
<br />
"If the original of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers. If the originals no longer exist, or their location is unknown, give that information." ([[RS-1#3.5.1|ISAD 3.5.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of copies ===<br />
<br />
"If the copy of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers." ([[RS-1#3.5.2|ISAD 3.5.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Related units of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record information about units of description in the same repository or elsewhere that are related by provenance or other association(s). Use appropriate introductory wording and explain the nature of the relationship . If the related unit of description is a finding aid, use the finding aids element of description ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]]) to make the reference to it." ([[RS-1#3.5.3|ISAD 3.5.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Publication note ===<br />
<br />
"Record a citation to, and/or information about a publication that is about or based on the use, study, or analysis of the unit of description. Include references to published facsimiles or transcriptions." ([[RS-1#3.5.4|ISAD 3.5.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional publication notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of publication notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a publication note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
== Notes area ==<br />
<br />
"Record specialized or other important information not accommodated by any of the defined elements of description." ([[RS-1#3.6.1|ISAD 3.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access points ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:radNotes.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: Access points area]]<br />
<br />
There is no limit to the number of [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] you can add in ICA-AtoM. When one term is entered, ICA-AtoM automatically provides [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for entering more terms. To delete an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]], click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Subject and place access points ===<br />
<br />
<p>Click on the "Subject" or "Place" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. You can narrow the list of choices by entering the first few letters of the [[Glossary#Term|term]]. If the [[Glossary#Term|term]] does not appear on the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission). For more on editing [[Glossary#Term|terms]] and adding to [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]], see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name access points ===<br />
<br />
The values in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are all drawn from existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. If the [[Glossary#Name|name]] you want to use does not appear in the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] create permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAD&diff=9648ISAD2010-06-24T15:55:42Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] > ISAD<br />
<br />
<br />
== Identity area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit archival description: identity area. Note asterisks next to mandatory fields]]<br />
<br />
The "identity area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "essential information ... to identify the unit of description" ([[RS-1#i.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Reference code ===<br />
<br />
For unique identification, the reference code may contain any or all of the following elements:<br />
* the country code in accordance with the latest version of ISO 3166, Codes for the representation of names of countries<br />
* the repository code in accordance with the national repository code standard or other unique location identifier<br />
* a specific local reference code, control number, or other unique identifier<br />
<br />
All three elements must be present for the purpose of information exchange at the international level. ([[RS-1#3.1.1|ISAD 3.1.1]])<br />
<br />
A country code and repository code will automatically be included in the reference code whenever the highest-level [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] is linked to an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] (see [[#Context area|Context area]]). The [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] description must have the following [[Glossary#Field|fields]] filled out in order for this to happen: the "Identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH identity area]] and the "country" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH contact area]].<br />
<br />
Information entered into the "identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] at lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]] will appear as part of the reference code when the archival description is saved and displayed.<br />
<br />
Each [[Glossary#Child record|child]] archival description will inherit reference code data entered at the [[Glossary#Parent record|parent]] [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The reference code '''will not be displayed''' in either the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for any description that does not have its own identifier.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title ===<br />
<br />
<blockquote><br />
<br />
<p>Provide either a formal title or a concise supplied title in accordance with the rules of multilevel description and national conventions. If appropriate, abridge a long formal title, but only if this can be done without loss of essential information.<br />
<br />
<p>For supplied titles, at the higher level, include the name of the creator of the records. At lower levels one may include, for example, the name of the author of the document and a term indicating the form of the material comprising the unit of description and, where appropriate, a phrase reflecting function, activity, subject, location, or theme.<br />
<br />
<p>Distinguish between formal and supplied titles according to national or language conventions.<br />
<br />
</blockquote><br />
<br />
For rules and conventions, see [[RS-1#3.1.2|ISAD 3.1.2]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date(s) ===<br />
<br />
Select an [[Glossary#Event|event]] type (either creation or accumulation).<br />
<br />
Enter a four-digit start year and a four-digit end year. The end year [[Glossary#Field|field]] can be left blank if further accruals are expected, if it is unknown, or if it is the same as the start year.<br />
<br />
Enter a date display if it is different from the start and end year. For example, if start year is 1927 and end year is 1944, the default display will be "1927-1944" unless you use the date display [[Glossary#Field|field]] to display, for example, "June 1927 - [ca. 1944]".<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
You can add as many sets of dates as required. For example, an item might separate dates for creation, publication and reproduction.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
[[RS-1#3.1.3|ISAD 3.1.3]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Level of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record the level of this unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.1.4|ISAD 3.1.4]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a default [[Glossary#Value list|value list]] of [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]]; this can customized by [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Add new child levels ===<br />
<br />
See [[Add a new archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Extent and medium ===<br />
<br />
Record the extent of the unit of description by giving the number of physical or logical units in arabic numerals and the unit of measurement. Give the specific medium (media) of the unit of description. Alternatively, give the linear shelf space or cubic storage space of the unit of description. ([[RS-1#3.1.5|ISAD 3.1.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Context area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: context area]]<br />
<br />
The "context area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "information about the origin and custody of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name of creator(s) ===<br />
<br />
Click on the "Name of creator(s)" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a name from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the name does not appear on this list, you can type it in and a new authority record will be created.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
When the record is saved, the administrative history of the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] appears in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. This information is pulled in from the creator's [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. To edit this information you will need to edit the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Repository ===<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Select a repository only at the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]]; leave this field blank at the lower levels if they are held by the same repository (see [[RS-1#2.4|ISAD 2.4 Non-Repetition of Information]]). It is important to remember this because if a repository is selected for the lower levels then these lower levels will all be displayed in the [[Glossary#Holdings|holdings]] area of an archival institution's [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
Click on the "Repository" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] that holds the archival material being described. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the repository does not appear in this list, you can type it in and a new repository record will be created.<br />
<br />
=== Archival history ===<br />
<br />
"Record the successive transfers of ownership, responsibility and/or custody of the unit of description and indicate those actions, such as history of the arrangement, production of contemporary finding aids, re-use of the records for other purposes or software migrations, that have contributed to its present structure and arrangement. Give the dates of these actions, insofar as they can be ascertained. If the archival history is unknown, record that information. Optionally, when the unit of description is acquired directly from the creator, do not record an archival history but rather, record this information as the "immediate source of acquisition"." ([[RS-1#3.2.3|ISAD 3.2.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Immediate source of acquisition or transfer ===<br />
<br />
"Record the source from which the unit of description was acquired and the date and/or method of acquisition if any or all of this information is not confidential. If the source is unknown, record that information. Optionally, add accession numbers or codes." ([[RS-1#3.2.4|ISAD 3.2.4]])<br />
<br />
== Content and structure area ==<br />
<br />
The "content and structure" area contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the subject matter and arrangement of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Scope and content ===<br />
<br />
"Give a summary of the scope (such as time periods and geographical location) and content, (such as documentary forms, subject matter and administrative processes) of the records, appropriate to the level of description." ([[RS-1#3.3.1|ISAD 3.3.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Appraisal, destruction and scheduling information ===<br />
<br />
"Record appraisal, destruction and scheduling actions taken on or planned for the records, especially if they may affect the interpretation of the material. Where appropriate, record the authority for the action." ([[RS-1#3.3.2|ISAD 3.3.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Accruals ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate if accruals are expected. Where appropriate, give an estimate of their quantity and frequency." ([[RS-1#3.3.3|ISAD 3.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== System of arrangement ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the internal structure, order and/or the system of classification of the unit of description. Note how these have been treated by the archivist. For electronic records, record or reference information on system design. Alternatively, include any of this information in the ''scope and content'' element ([[RS-1#3.3.1|3.3.1]]) according to national conventions." ([[RS-1#3.3.4|ISAD 3.3.4]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Conditions of access and use area ==<br />
<br />
The "conditions of access and use area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the availability of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing access ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the law or legal status, contract, regulation or policy that affects access to the unit of description. Indicate the extent of the period of closure and the date at which the material will open when appropriate." ([[RS-1#3.4.1|ISAD 3.4.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing reproduction ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about conditions, such as copyright, governing the reproduction of the unit of description after access has been provided. If the existence of such conditions is unknown, record this. If there are no conditions, no statement is necessary." ([[RS-1#3.4.2|ISAD 3.4.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Language of material and script of material ===<br />
<br />
"Record the language(s) and/or script(s) of the materials comprising the unit of description. Note any distinctive alphabets, scripts, symbol systems or abbreviations employed. Optionally, also include the appropriate ISO codes for language(s) (ISO 639-1 and ISO 639-2: International Standards for Language Codes) or script(s), (ISO 15924: International Standard for Names of Scripts)." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this ISAD [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as two separate [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], each with [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]]. The [[Glossary#Value list|value lists]] are based on the ISO standards and cannot be edited. Click on the desired field and select the language or script from the drop-down menu; to narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language or script. Note that there is no limit to the number of languages or scripts you can add.<br />
<br />
To record a narrative note relating to either [[Glossary#Field|field]], use the [[#Notes area|notes area]].<br />
<br />
=== Physical characteristics ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate any important physical conditions, such as preservation requirements, that affect the use of the unit of description. Note any software and/or hardware required to access the unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Finding aids ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about any finding aids that the repository or records creator may have that provide information relating to the context and contents of the unit of description. If appropriate, include information on where to obtain a copy." ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Allied materials area ==<br />
<br />
The "allied materials area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about materials having an important relationship to the unit of description)" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of originals ===<br />
<br />
"If the original of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers. If the originals no longer exist, or their location is unknown, give that information." ([[RS-1#3.5.1|ISAD 3.5.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of copies ===<br />
<br />
"If the copy of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers." ([[RS-1#3.5.2|ISAD 3.5.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Related units of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record information about units of description in the same repository or elsewhere that are related by provenance or other association(s). Use appropriate introductory wording and explain the nature of the relationship . If the related unit of description is a finding aid, use the finding aids element of description ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]]) to make the reference to it." ([[RS-1#3.5.3|ISAD 3.5.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Publication note ===<br />
<br />
"Record a citation to, and/or information about a publication that is about or based on the use, study, or analysis of the unit of description. Include references to published facsimiles or transcriptions." ([[RS-1#3.5.4|ISAD 3.5.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional publication notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of publication notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a publication note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
== Notes area ==<br />
<br />
"Record specialized or other important information not accommodated by any of the defined elements of description." ([[RS-1#3.6.1|ISAD 3.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access points ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:radNotes.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: Access points area]]<br />
<br />
There is no limit to the number of [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] you can add in ICA-AtoM. When one term is entered, ICA-AtoM automatically provides [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for entering more terms. To delete an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]], click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Subject and place access points ===<br />
<br />
<p>Click on the "Subject" or "Place" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. You can narrow the list of choices by entering the first few letters of the [[Glossary#Term|term]]. If the [[Glossary#Term|term]] does not appear on the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission). For more on editing [[Glossary#Term|terms]] and adding to [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]], see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name access points ===<br />
<br />
The values in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are all drawn from existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. If the [[Glossary#Name|name]] you want to use does not appear in the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] create permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAD&diff=9579ISAD2010-06-18T18:17:54Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] > ISAD<br />
<br />
<br />
== Identity area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit archival description: identity area. Note asterisks next to mandatory fields]]<br />
<br />
The "identity area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "essential information ... to identify the unit of description" ([[RS-1#i.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Reference code ===<br />
<br />
For unique identification, the reference code may contain any or all of the following elements:<br />
* the country code in accordance with the latest version of ISO 3166, Codes for the representation of names of countries<br />
* the repository code in accordance with the national repository code standard or other unique location identifier<br />
* a specific local reference code, control number, or other unique identifier<br />
<br />
All three elements must be present for the purpose of information exchange at the international level. ([[RS-1#3.1.1|ISAD 3.1.1]])<br />
<br />
A country code and repository code will automatically be included in the reference code whenever the highest-level [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] is linked to an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] (see [[#Context area|Context area]]). The [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] description must have the following [[Glossary#Field|fields]] filled out in order for this to happen: the "Identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH identity area]] and the "country" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH contact area]].<br />
<br />
Information entered into the "identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] at lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]] will appear as part of the reference code when the archival description is saved and displayed.<br />
<br />
Each [[Glossary#Child record|child]] archival description will inherit reference code data entered at the [[Glossary#Parent record|parent]] [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The reference code '''will not be displayed''' in either the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for any description that does not have its own identifier.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title ===<br />
<br />
<blockquote><br />
<br />
<p>Provide either a formal title or a concise supplied title in accordance with the rules of multilevel description and national conventions. If appropriate, abridge a long formal title, but only if this can be done without loss of essential information.<br />
<br />
<p>For supplied titles, at the higher level, include the name of the creator of the records. At lower levels one may include, for example, the name of the author of the document and a term indicating the form of the material comprising the unit of description and, where appropriate, a phrase reflecting function, activity, subject, location, or theme.<br />
<br />
<p>Distinguish between formal and supplied titles according to national or language conventions.<br />
<br />
</blockquote><br />
<br />
For rules and conventions, see [[RS-1#3.1.2|ISAD 3.1.2]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date(s) ===<br />
<br />
Select an [[Glossary#Event|event]] type (either creation or accumulation).<br />
<br />
Enter a four-digit start year and a four-digit end year. The end year [[Glossary#Field|field]] can be left blank if further accruals are expected, if it is unknown, or if it is the same as the start year.<br />
<br />
Enter a date display if it is different from the start and end year. For example, if start year is 1927 and end year is 1944, the default display will be "1927-1944" unless you use the date display [[Glossary#Field|field]] to display, for example, "June 1927 - [ca. 1944]".<br />
<br />
Note that you can add as many sets of dates as required. For example, an item might separate dates for creation, publication and reproduction.<br />
<br />
[[RS-1#3.1.3|ISAD 3.1.3]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Level of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record the level of this unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.1.4|ISAD 3.1.4]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a default [[Glossary#Value list|value list]] of [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]]; this can customized by [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Add new child levels ===<br />
<br />
See [[Add a new archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Extent and medium ===<br />
<br />
Record the extent of the unit of description by giving the number of physical or logical units in arabic numerals and the unit of measurement. Give the specific medium (media) of the unit of description. Alternatively, give the linear shelf space or cubic storage space of the unit of description. ([[RS-1#3.1.5|ISAD 3.1.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Context area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: context area]]<br />
<br />
The "context area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "information about the origin and custody of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name of creator(s) ===<br />
<br />
Click on the "Name of creator(s)" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a name from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the name does not appear on this list, you can type it in and a new authority record will be created.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
When the record is saved, the administrative history of the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] appears in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. This information is pulled in from the creator's [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. To edit this information you will need to edit the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Repository ===<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Select a repository only at the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]]; leave this field blank at the lower levels if they are held by the same repository (see [[RS-1#2.4|ISAD 2.4 Non-Repetition of Information]]). It is important to remember this because if a repository is selected for the lower levels then these lower levels will all be displayed in the [[Glossary#Holdings|holdings]] area of an archival institution's [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
Click on the "Repository" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] that holds the archival material being described. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the repository does not appear in this list, you can type it in and a new repository record will be created.<br />
<br />
=== Archival history ===<br />
<br />
"Record the successive transfers of ownership, responsibility and/or custody of the unit of description and indicate those actions, such as history of the arrangement, production of contemporary finding aids, re-use of the records for other purposes or software migrations, that have contributed to its present structure and arrangement. Give the dates of these actions, insofar as they can be ascertained. If the archival history is unknown, record that information. Optionally, when the unit of description is acquired directly from the creator, do not record an archival history but rather, record this information as the "immediate source of acquisition"." ([[RS-1#3.2.3|ISAD 3.2.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Immediate source of acquisition or transfer ===<br />
<br />
"Record the source from which the unit of description was acquired and the date and/or method of acquisition if any or all of this information is not confidential. If the source is unknown, record that information. Optionally, add accession numbers or codes." ([[RS-1#3.2.4|ISAD 3.2.4]])<br />
<br />
== Content and structure area ==<br />
<br />
The "content and structure" area contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the subject matter and arrangement of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Scope and content ===<br />
<br />
"Give a summary of the scope (such as time periods and geographical location) and content, (such as documentary forms, subject matter and administrative processes) of the records, appropriate to the level of description." ([[RS-1#3.3.1|ISAD 3.3.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Appraisal, destruction and scheduling information ===<br />
<br />
"Record appraisal, destruction and scheduling actions taken on or planned for the records, especially if they may affect the interpretation of the material. Where appropriate, record the authority for the action." ([[RS-1#3.3.2|ISAD 3.3.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Accruals ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate if accruals are expected. Where appropriate, give an estimate of their quantity and frequency." ([[RS-1#3.3.3|ISAD 3.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== System of arrangement ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the internal structure, order and/or the system of classification of the unit of description. Note how these have been treated by the archivist. For electronic records, record or reference information on system design. Alternatively, include any of this information in the ''scope and content'' element ([[RS-1#3.3.1|3.3.1]]) according to national conventions." ([[RS-1#3.3.4|ISAD 3.3.4]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Conditions of access and use area ==<br />
<br />
The "conditions of access and use area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the availability of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing access ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the law or legal status, contract, regulation or policy that affects access to the unit of description. Indicate the extent of the period of closure and the date at which the material will open when appropriate." ([[RS-1#3.4.1|ISAD 3.4.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing reproduction ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about conditions, such as copyright, governing the reproduction of the unit of description after access has been provided. If the existence of such conditions is unknown, record this. If there are no conditions, no statement is necessary." ([[RS-1#3.4.2|ISAD 3.4.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Language of material and script of material ===<br />
<br />
"Record the language(s) and/or script(s) of the materials comprising the unit of description. Note any distinctive alphabets, scripts, symbol systems or abbreviations employed. Optionally, also include the appropriate ISO codes for language(s) (ISO 639-1 and ISO 639-2: International Standards for Language Codes) or script(s), (ISO 15924: International Standard for Names of Scripts)." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this ISAD [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as two separate [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], each with [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]]. The [[Glossary#Value list|value lists]] are based on the ISO standards and cannot be edited. Click on the desired field and select the language or script from the drop-down menu; to narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language or script. Note that there is no limit to the number of languages or scripts you can add.<br />
<br />
To record a narrative note relating to either [[Glossary#Field|field]], use the [[#Notes area|notes area]].<br />
<br />
=== Physical characteristics ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate any important physical conditions, such as preservation requirements, that affect the use of the unit of description. Note any software and/or hardware required to access the unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Finding aids ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about any finding aids that the repository or records creator may have that provide information relating to the context and contents of the unit of description. If appropriate, include information on where to obtain a copy." ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Allied materials area ==<br />
<br />
The "allied materials area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about materials having an important relationship to the unit of description)" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of originals ===<br />
<br />
"If the original of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers. If the originals no longer exist, or their location is unknown, give that information." ([[RS-1#3.5.1|ISAD 3.5.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of copies ===<br />
<br />
"If the copy of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers." ([[RS-1#3.5.2|ISAD 3.5.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Related units of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record information about units of description in the same repository or elsewhere that are related by provenance or other association(s). Use appropriate introductory wording and explain the nature of the relationship . If the related unit of description is a finding aid, use the finding aids element of description ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]]) to make the reference to it." ([[RS-1#3.5.3|ISAD 3.5.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Publication note ===<br />
<br />
"Record a citation to, and/or information about a publication that is about or based on the use, study, or analysis of the unit of description. Include references to published facsimiles or transcriptions." ([[RS-1#3.5.4|ISAD 3.5.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional publication notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of publication notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a publication note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
== Notes area ==<br />
<br />
"Record specialized or other important information not accommodated by any of the defined elements of description." ([[RS-1#3.6.1|ISAD 3.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access points ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:radNotes.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: Access points area]]<br />
<br />
There is no limit to the number of [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] you can add in ICA-AtoM. When one term is entered, ICA-AtoM automatically provides [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for entering more terms. To delete an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]], click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Subject and place access points ===<br />
<br />
<p>Click on the "Subject" or "Place" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. You can narrow the list of choices by entering the first few letters of the [[Glossary#Term|term]]. If the [[Glossary#Term|term]] does not appear on the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission). For more on editing [[Glossary#Term|terms]] and adding to [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]], see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name access points ===<br />
<br />
The values in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are all drawn from existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. If the [[Glossary#Name|name]] you want to use does not appear in the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] create permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAD&diff=9578ISAD2010-06-18T18:17:10Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] > ISAD<br />
<br />
<br />
== Identity area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit archival description: identity area. Note asterisks next to mandatory fields]]<br />
<br />
The "identity area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "essential information ... to identify the unit of description" ([[RS-1#i.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Reference code ===<br />
<br />
For unique identification, the reference code may contain any or all of the following elements:<br />
* the country code in accordance with the latest version of ISO 3166, Codes for the representation of names of countries<br />
* the repository code in accordance with the national repository code standard or other unique location identifier<br />
* a specific local reference code, control number, or other unique identifier<br />
<br />
All three elements must be present for the purpose of information exchange at the international level. ([[RS-1#3.1.1|ISAD 3.1.1]])<br />
<br />
A country code and repository code will automatically be included in the reference code whenever the highest-level [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] is linked to an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] (see [[#Context area|Context area]]). The [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] description must have the following [[Glossary#Field|fields]] filled out in order for this to happen: the "Identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH identity area]] and the "country" [[Glossary#Field|field]] in the [[ISDIAH contact area]].<br />
<br />
Information entered into the "identifier" [[Glossary#Field|field]] at lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]] will appear as part of the reference code when the archival description is saved and displayed.<br />
<br />
Each [[Glossary#Child record|child]] archival description will inherit reference code data entered at the [[Glossary#Parent record|parent]] [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The reference code '''will not be displayed''' in either the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or [[Glossary#View page|view page]] for any description that does not have its own identifier.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title ===<br />
<br />
<blockquote><br />
<br />
Provide either a formal title or a concise supplied title in accordance with the rules of multilevel description and national conventions. If appropriate, abridge a long formal title, but only if this can be done without loss of essential information.<br />
<br />
For supplied titles, at the higher level, include the name of the creator of the records. At lower levels one may include, for example, the name of the author of the document and a term indicating the form of the material comprising the unit of description and, where appropriate, a phrase reflecting function, activity, subject, location, or theme.<br />
<br />
Distinguish between formal and supplied titles according to national or language conventions.<br />
<br />
</blockquote><br />
<br />
For rules and conventions, see [[RS-1#3.1.2|ISAD 3.1.2]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date(s) ===<br />
<br />
Select an [[Glossary#Event|event]] type (either creation or accumulation).<br />
<br />
Enter a four-digit start year and a four-digit end year. The end year [[Glossary#Field|field]] can be left blank if further accruals are expected, if it is unknown, or if it is the same as the start year.<br />
<br />
Enter a date display if it is different from the start and end year. For example, if start year is 1927 and end year is 1944, the default display will be "1927-1944" unless you use the date display [[Glossary#Field|field]] to display, for example, "June 1927 - [ca. 1944]".<br />
<br />
Note that you can add as many sets of dates as required. For example, an item might separate dates for creation, publication and reproduction.<br />
<br />
[[RS-1#3.1.3|ISAD 3.1.3]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Level of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record the level of this unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.1.4|ISAD 3.1.4]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a default [[Glossary#Value list|value list]] of [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]]; this can customized by [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Add new child levels ===<br />
<br />
See [[Add a new archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Extent and medium ===<br />
<br />
Record the extent of the unit of description by giving the number of physical or logical units in arabic numerals and the unit of measurement. Give the specific medium (media) of the unit of description. Alternatively, give the linear shelf space or cubic storage space of the unit of description. ([[RS-1#3.1.5|ISAD 3.1.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Context area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isad2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: context area]]<br />
<br />
The "context area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for conveying "information about the origin and custody of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name of creator(s) ===<br />
<br />
Click on the "Name of creator(s)" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a name from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the name does not appear on this list, you can type it in and a new authority record will be created.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
When the record is saved, the administrative history of the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] appears in the [[Glossary#View page|view page]]. This information is pulled in from the creator's [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. To edit this information you will need to edit the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Repository ===<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Select a repository only at the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]]; leave this field blank at the lower levels if they are held by the same repository (see [[RS-1#2.4|ISAD 2.4 Non-Repetition of Information]]). It is important to remember this because if a repository is selected for the lower levels then these lower levels will all be displayed in the [[Glossary#Holdings|holdings]] area of an archival institution's [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
Click on the "Repository" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] that holds the archival material being described. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the repository does not appear in this list, you can type it in and a new repository record will be created.<br />
<br />
=== Archival history ===<br />
<br />
"Record the successive transfers of ownership, responsibility and/or custody of the unit of description and indicate those actions, such as history of the arrangement, production of contemporary finding aids, re-use of the records for other purposes or software migrations, that have contributed to its present structure and arrangement. Give the dates of these actions, insofar as they can be ascertained. If the archival history is unknown, record that information. Optionally, when the unit of description is acquired directly from the creator, do not record an archival history but rather, record this information as the "immediate source of acquisition"." ([[RS-1#3.2.3|ISAD 3.2.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Immediate source of acquisition or transfer ===<br />
<br />
"Record the source from which the unit of description was acquired and the date and/or method of acquisition if any or all of this information is not confidential. If the source is unknown, record that information. Optionally, add accession numbers or codes." ([[RS-1#3.2.4|ISAD 3.2.4]])<br />
<br />
== Content and structure area ==<br />
<br />
The "content and structure" area contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the subject matter and arrangement of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Scope and content ===<br />
<br />
"Give a summary of the scope (such as time periods and geographical location) and content, (such as documentary forms, subject matter and administrative processes) of the records, appropriate to the level of description." ([[RS-1#3.3.1|ISAD 3.3.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Appraisal, destruction and scheduling information ===<br />
<br />
"Record appraisal, destruction and scheduling actions taken on or planned for the records, especially if they may affect the interpretation of the material. Where appropriate, record the authority for the action." ([[RS-1#3.3.2|ISAD 3.3.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Accruals ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate if accruals are expected. Where appropriate, give an estimate of their quantity and frequency." ([[RS-1#3.3.3|ISAD 3.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== System of arrangement ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the internal structure, order and/or the system of classification of the unit of description. Note how these have been treated by the archivist. For electronic records, record or reference information on system design. Alternatively, include any of this information in the ''scope and content'' element ([[RS-1#3.3.1|3.3.1]]) according to national conventions." ([[RS-1#3.3.4|ISAD 3.3.4]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Conditions of access and use area ==<br />
<br />
The "conditions of access and use area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about the availability of the unit of description" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing access ===<br />
<br />
"Specify the law or legal status, contract, regulation or policy that affects access to the unit of description. Indicate the extent of the period of closure and the date at which the material will open when appropriate." ([[RS-1#3.4.1|ISAD 3.4.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Conditions governing reproduction ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about conditions, such as copyright, governing the reproduction of the unit of description after access has been provided. If the existence of such conditions is unknown, record this. If there are no conditions, no statement is necessary." ([[RS-1#3.4.2|ISAD 3.4.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Language of material and script of material ===<br />
<br />
"Record the language(s) and/or script(s) of the materials comprising the unit of description. Note any distinctive alphabets, scripts, symbol systems or abbreviations employed. Optionally, also include the appropriate ISO codes for language(s) (ISO 639-1 and ISO 639-2: International Standards for Language Codes) or script(s), (ISO 15924: International Standard for Names of Scripts)." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this ISAD [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as two separate [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], each with [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]]. The [[Glossary#Value list|value lists]] are based on the ISO standards and cannot be edited. Click on the desired field and select the language or script from the drop-down menu; to narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language or script. Note that there is no limit to the number of languages or scripts you can add.<br />
<br />
To record a narrative note relating to either [[Glossary#Field|field]], use the [[#Notes area|notes area]].<br />
<br />
=== Physical characteristics ===<br />
<br />
"Indicate any important physical conditions, such as preservation requirements, that affect the use of the unit of description. Note any software and/or hardware required to access the unit of description." ([[RS-1#3.4.3|ISAD 3.4.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Finding aids ===<br />
<br />
"Give information about any finding aids that the repository or records creator may have that provide information relating to the context and contents of the unit of description. If appropriate, include information on where to obtain a copy." ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Allied materials area ==<br />
<br />
The "allied materials area" contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that convey information "about materials having an important relationship to the unit of description)" ([[RS-1#I.11|ISAD I.11]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of originals ===<br />
<br />
"If the original of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers. If the originals no longer exist, or their location is unknown, give that information." ([[RS-1#3.5.1|ISAD 3.5.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Location of copies ===<br />
<br />
"If the copy of the unit of description is available (either in the institution or elsewhere) record its location, together with any significant control numbers." ([[RS-1#3.5.2|ISAD 3.5.2]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Related units of description ===<br />
<br />
"Record information about units of description in the same repository or elsewhere that are related by provenance or other association(s). Use appropriate introductory wording and explain the nature of the relationship . If the related unit of description is a finding aid, use the finding aids element of description ([[RS-1#3.4.5|ISAD 3.4.5]]) to make the reference to it." ([[RS-1#3.5.3|ISAD 3.5.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Publication note ===<br />
<br />
"Record a citation to, and/or information about a publication that is about or based on the use, study, or analysis of the unit of description. Include references to published facsimiles or transcriptions." ([[RS-1#3.5.4|ISAD 3.5.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional publication notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of publication notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a publication note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
== Notes area ==<br />
<br />
"Record specialized or other important information not accommodated by any of the defined elements of description." ([[RS-1#3.6.1|ISAD 3.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Enter the note. Add additional notes by clicking your cursor outside the field; another box will appear. There is no limit to the number of notes you can add.<br />
<br />
To delete a note, click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access points ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:radNotes.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description: Access points area]]<br />
<br />
There is no limit to the number of [[Glossary#Access point|access points]] you can add in ICA-AtoM. When one term is entered, ICA-AtoM automatically provides [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for entering more terms. To delete an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]], click the [[Glossary#Delete icon|delete icon]] next to it in the list.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Subject and place access points ===<br />
<br />
<p>Click on the "Subject" or "Place" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. You can narrow the list of choices by entering the first few letters of the [[Glossary#Term|term]]. If the [[Glossary#Term|term]] does not appear on the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission). For more on editing [[Glossary#Term|terms]] and adding to [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomies]], see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Name access points ===<br />
<br />
The values in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are all drawn from existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]. If the [[Glossary#Name|name]] you want to use does not appear in the list, type it in and a new [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] create permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAAR_relationships_area&diff=9577ISAAR relationships area2010-06-18T17:38:04Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Relationships area}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit authority records]] > Relationships area (authority records)<br />
<br />
<br />
The purpose of the relationships [[Glossary#Information area|information area]] is to record relationships between different [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] - for example, predecessor/successor relationships or parent/child relationships - and between [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Related corporate bodies, persons, or families ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel1.png|500px|right|thumb|Open relationship dialogue box by clicking on the blue Add new link under Related Corporate bodies, persons or families]]<br />
<br />
To register a new relationship, under "Related corporate bodies, persons or families" click the blue "Add new" link. ICA-AtoM opens a pop-up dialogue box for data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Authorized form of name ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel2.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data, then click Submit]]<br />
<br />
"Record the authorized form of name and any relevant unique identifiers, including the authority record identifier, for the related entity." ([[RS-2#5.3.1|ISAAR 5.3.1]])<br />
<br />
Select the name of the related [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] by typing in the first few letters and selecting it from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Category of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Record a general category into which the relationship being described falls." ([[RS-2#5.3.2|ISAAR 5.3.2]])<br />
<br />
Choose from associative, family, hierarchical, and temporal in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Description of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Record a precise description of the nature of the relationship between the entity described in this authority record and the other related entity, e.g. superior agency, subordinate agency, owner, predecessor, husband, wife, son, cousin, teacher of, student of, professional colleague...A narrative description of the history and/or nature of the relationship may also be provided here." ([[RS-2#5.3.3|ISAAR 5.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date/end date ===<br />
<br />
"Record when relevant the commencement date of the relationship or succession date and, when relevant, the cessation date of the relationship." ([[RS-2#5.3.4||ISAAR 5.3.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the start and end year of the date range. If the start and end years are the same, enter only in the "year" field and leave the "end year" blank. Do not use any qualifiers here (e.g. "ca.") or typographical symbols (e.g. "[194?]") to express uncertainty.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date display ===<br />
<br />
Enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].<br />
Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. "ca. 1940-1980" or "12 Aug. 1940 - 31 July 1980").<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
=== Save changes ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel3.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationships area in authority record view page]]<br />
<br />
Click the Submit button when you have finished entering the relationship information. When you have finished editing the authority record, click the Save button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
<br />
In the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]], you will see that the relationship information appears with the related entity as a link. Clicking on the link will take you to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] for the related entity. Note that the relationship information is captured on the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] of the related [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. Editing the relationship information in either [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will save changes to the information in both [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Related resources ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, creator and accumulator relationships between [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] and [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] can be created either from the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or from the relationships area in the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]. Other types of relationships (contributor, publisher, collector, etc.) can only be created in the relationships area of the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel1.png|500px|right|thumb|Open relationship dialogue box by clicking on the blue Add new link under Related resources]]<br />
<br />
When you open the relationships area in an [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] that has already been selected as the creator for an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], you will see this relationship listed under related resources.<br />
<br />
To register a new relationship, under "Related resources" click the blue "Add new" link. ICA-AtoM opens a pop-up dialogue box for data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title of related resource ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel4.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data]]<br />
<br />
The purpose of this field is "[t]o identify uniquely the related resources and/or enable the linking of the authority record to a description of the related resources, where such descriptions exist." ([[RS-2#6.1|ISAAR 2.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Select the title of the related [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] by typing in the first few letters and selecting it from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Nature of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Describe the nature of the relationships between the corporate body, person or family and the related resource, e.g. creator, author, subject, custodian, copyright owner, controller, owner."<br />
<br />
The values in this [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are derived from the event types [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ([[RS-2#6.3]]) For instructions on editing taxonomies, see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Type of related resource ===<br />
<br />
"Identify the type of related resources, e.g. Archival materials (fonds, record series, etc), archival description, finding aid, monograph, journal article, web site, photograph, museum collection, documentary film, oral history recording." ([[RS-2#6.2||ISAAR 2.6.2]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM currently permits only one default resource type, "archival material".<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date/end date ===<br />
<br />
"Record when relevant the commencement date of the relationship or succession date and, when relevant, the cessation date of the relationship." ([[RS-2#6.4|ISAAR 2.6.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the start and end year of the date range. If the start and end years are the same, enter only in the "year" field and leave the "end year" blank. Do not use any qualifiers here (e.g. "ca.") or typographical symbols (e.g. "[194?]") to express uncertainty.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date display ===<br />
<br />
Enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. "ca. 1940-1980" or "12 Aug. 1940 - 31 July 1980").<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Save changes ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel5.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationship displayed in authority record's context menu: in this case, "Collector of"]]<br />
<br />
Click the Submit button when you have finished entering the relationship information. When you have finished editing the authority record, click the Save button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record's]] [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] will now show the relationship to the archival material.<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel6.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationship displayed in archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The related [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]] will also show the new relationship in the Date(s) [[Glossary#Field|field]] and as a name [[Glossary#Access point|access point]].<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=ISAAR_relationships_area&diff=9576ISAAR relationships area2010-06-18T17:36:41Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Relationships area}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit authority records]] > Relationships area (authority records)<br />
<br />
<br />
The purpose of the relationships [[Glossary#Information area|information area]] is to record relationships between different [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] - for example, predecessor/successor relationships or parent/child relationships - and between [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Related corporate bodies, persons, or families ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel1.png|500px|right|thumb|Open relationship dialogue box by clicking on the blue Add new link under Related Corporate bodies, persons or families]]<br />
<br />
To register a new relationship, under "Related corporate bodies, persons or families" click the blue "Add new" link. ICA-AtoM opens a pop-up dialogue box for data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Authorized form of name ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel2.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data, then click Submit]]<br />
<br />
"Record the authorized form of name and any relevant unique identifiers, including the authority record identifier, for the related entity." ([[RS-2#5.3.1|ISAAR 5.3.1]])<br />
<br />
Select the name of the related [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] by typing in the first few letters and selecting it from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Category of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Record a general category into which the relationship being described falls." ([[RS-2#5.3.2|ISAAR 5.3.2]])<br />
<br />
Choose from associative, family, hierarchical, and temporal in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Description of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Record a precise description of the nature of the relationship between the entity described in this authority record and the other related entity, e.g. superior agency, subordinate agency, owner, predecessor, husband, wife, son, cousin, teacher of, student of, professional colleague...A narrative description of the history and/or nature of the relationship may also be provided here." ([[RS-2#5.3.3|ISAAR 5.3.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date/end date ===<br />
<br />
"Record when relevant the commencement date of the relationship or succession date and, when relevant, the cessation date of the relationship." ([[RS-2#5.3.4||ISAAR 5.3.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the start and end year of the date range. If the start and end years are the same, enter only in the "year" field and leave the "end year" blank. Do not use any qualifiers here (e.g. "ca.") or typographical symbols (e.g. "[194?]") to express uncertainty.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date display ===<br />
<br />
Enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].<br />
Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. "ca. 1940-1980" or "12 Aug. 1940 - 31 July 1980").<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Save changes ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel3.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationships area in authority record view page]]<br />
<br />
Click the Submit button when you have finished entering the relationship information. When you have finished editing the authority record, click the Save button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
<br />
In the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]], you will see that the relationship information appears with the related entity as a link. Clicking on the link will take you to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] for the related entity. Note that the relationship information is captured on the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] of the related [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]. Editing the relationship information in either [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] will save changes to the information in both [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Related resources ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, creator and accumulator relationships between [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] and [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] can be created either from the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]] or from the relationships area in the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]. Other types of relationships (contributor, publisher, collector, etc.) can only be created in the relationships area of the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel1.png|500px|right|thumb|Open relationship dialogue box by clicking on the blue Add new link under Related resources]]<br />
<br />
When you open the relationships area in an [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] that has already been selected as the creator for an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], you will see this relationship listed under related resources.<br />
<br />
To register a new relationship, under "Related resources" click the blue "Add new" link. ICA-AtoM opens a pop-up dialogue box for data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Title of related resource ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel4.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data]]<br />
<br />
The purpose of this field is "[t]o identify uniquely the related resources and/or enable the linking of the authority record to a description of the related resources, where such descriptions exist." ([[RS-2#6.1|ISAAR 2.6.1]])<br />
<br />
Select the title of the related [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] by typing in the first few letters and selecting it from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Nature of relationship ===<br />
<br />
"Describe the nature of the relationships between the corporate body, person or family and the related resource, e.g. creator, author, subject, custodian, copyright owner, controller, owner."<br />
<br />
The values in this [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] are derived from the event types [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ([[RS-2#6.3]]) For instructions on editing taxonomies, see [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Type of related resource ===<br />
<br />
"Identify the type of related resources, e.g. Archival materials (fonds, record series, etc), archival description, finding aid, monograph, journal article, web site, photograph, museum collection, documentary film, oral history recording." ([[RS-2#6.2||ISAAR 2.6.2]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM currently permits only one default resource type, "archival material".<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date/end date ===<br />
<br />
"Record when relevant the commencement date of the relationship or succession date and, when relevant, the cessation date of the relationship." ([[RS-2#6.4|ISAAR 2.6.4]])<br />
<br />
Enter the start and end year of the date range. If the start and end years are the same, enter only in the "year" field and leave the "end year" blank. Do not use any qualifiers here (e.g. "ca.") or typographical symbols (e.g. "[194?]") to express uncertainty.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date display ===<br />
<br />
Enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. "ca. 1940-1980" or "12 Aug. 1940 - 31 July 1980").<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Save changes ===<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel5.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationship displayed in authority record's context menu: in this case, "Collector of"]]<br />
<br />
Click the Submit button when you have finished entering the relationship information. When you have finished editing the authority record, click the Save button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record's]] [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] will now show the relationship to the archival material.<br />
<br />
[[Image:isaarRel6.png|500px|right|thumb|Relationship displayed in archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The related [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]] will also show the new relationship in the Date(s) [[Glossary#Field|field]] and as a name [[Glossary#Access point|access point]].<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Control_area&diff=9503Control area2010-06-17T18:28:15Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > Control area<br />
<br />
<br />
The control area is similar for [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] (ISAD and RAD templates only), [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. It contains [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that uniquely identify the description itself and records how, when, and by which archival institution the description was created and maintained.<br />
<br />
The following notes aim primarily to clarify ICA-AtoM procedures; for guidelines on what information to record in particular [[Glossary#Field|fields]], consult [[RS-1|ISAD]], [[RS-2|ISAAR]], or [[RS-3|ISDIAH]] or [[RS-4|ISDF]] as the content standard. The notes are organized by [[Glossary#Field|field]], with links to the applicable section(s) of the standards. Where there is a one-to-one correspondence between a [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] in the standard and an ICA-AtoM [[Glossary#Field|field]], the note simply gives the standard rule verbatim.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Description identifier ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:controlArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Control area]]<br />
<br />
"Record a unique description identifier in accordance with local and/or national conventions. If the description is to be used internationally, record the code of the country in which the description was created in accordance with the latest version of ISO 3166, Codes for the representation of names of countries. Where the creator of the description is an international organisation, give the organisational identifier in place of the country code." ([[RS-3#5.6.1|ISDIAH 5.6.1]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.1|ISAAR 5.4.1]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Institution identifier ==<br />
<br />
"Record the full authorised form of name(s) of the agency(ies) responsible for creating, modifying or disseminating the description or, alternatively, record a code for the agency in accordance with the national or international agency code standard." ([[RS-3#5.6.2|ISDIAH 5.6.2]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.2|ISAAR 5.4.2]])<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Rules or conventions ==<br />
<br />
"Record the international, national and/or local rules or conventions followed in preparing the description." ([[RS-1#3.7|ISAD 3.7.2]])<br />
<br />
"Record the names, and where useful the editions or publication dates, of the conventions or rules applied. Specify separately which rules have been applied for creating the Authorised form of name. Include reference to any system(s) of dating used to identify dates in this description (e.g. ISO 8601)." ([[RS-3#5.6.3|ISDIAH 5.6.3]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.3|ISAAR 5.4.3]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Status ==<br />
<br />
"Record the current status of the description, indicating whether it is a draft, finalized and/or revised...." ([[RS-3#5.6.4|ISDIAH 5.6.4]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.4|ISAAR 5.4.4]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] using values drawn from the description statuses [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]; [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] can customize the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to meet institutional standards.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of detail ==<br />
<br />
"Record whether the description consists of a minimal, partial or full level of detail in accordance with relevant international and/or national guidelines and/or rules. In the absence of national guidelines or rules, minimal descriptions are those that consist only of the three essential elements of an ISDIAH-compliant description (see [[RS-3#4.7|4.7]]), while full descriptions are those that convey information for all relevant ISDIAH elements of description." ([[RS-3#5.6.4|ISDIAH 5.6.5]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.5|ISAAR 5.4.5]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM ships with a [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] using values drawn from the description detail levels [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]; [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] can customize the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] to meet institutional standards.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Dates of creation, revision and deletion ==<br />
<br />
"Record the date(s) the entry was prepared and/or revised." ([[RS-1#3.7|ISAD 3.7.3]])<br />
<br />
"Record the date the description was created and the dates of any revisions to the description. Specify in the Rules and/or conventions element ([[RS-3#5.6.3|5.6.3]]) the system(s) of dating used, e.g. ISO 8601." ([[RS-3#5.6.6|ISDIAH 5.6.6]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.6|ISAAR 5.4.6]])<br />
<br />
<br />
== Language and script ==<br />
<br />
"Record the language(s) and/or script(s) of the description. Include the appropriate ISO codes for languages (ISO 639-2 ''Codes for the representation of names of languages'') and/or scripts (ISO 15924 Codes for the representation of names of scripts)." ([[RS-3#5.6.7|ISDIAH 5.6.7]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.7|ISAAR 5.4.7]])<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this ISAD [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as two separate [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], each with [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]]. The [[Glossary#Value list|value lists]] are based on the ISO standards and cannot be edited.<br />
<br />
Click on the desired field and select the language or script from the drop-down menu. To narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language or script.<br />
<br />
There is no limit to the number of languages or scripts you can add.<br />
<br />
To record a narrative note relating to either [[Glossary#Field|field]], use the notes area.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Sources ==<br />
<br />
"Record the sources consulted in establishing the description." ([[RS-3#5.6.8|ISDIAH 5.6.8]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.8|ISAAR 5.4.8]])<br />
<br />
This is a text field; ICA-AtoM does not structure the data in any predetermined way.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Notes ==<br />
<br />
"Record notes on sources consulted in preparing the description and who prepared it." ([[RS-1#3.7|ISAD 3.7.1]])<br />
<br />
"Record notes pertinent to the creation and maintenance of the description. For example, the names of persons responsible for creating and/or revising the description may be recorded here." ([[RS-3#5.6.9|ISDIAH 5.6.9]]; cf. [[RS-2#5.4.9|ISAAR 5.4.9]]).<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM implements this [[Glossary#Data element|data element]] as a [[Glossary#Multi-value field|multi-value field]].<br />
<br />
For an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], enter the data in the "Archivist's note" field. There is no limit to the number of notes that can be added.<br />
<br />
For an [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] or an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]], enter the note, select the note type; when you save the record, ICA-AtoM registers the note and displays it in the list above the data entry fields. There is no limit to the number of notes that can be added, but as of the current version of ICA-AtoM (1.0 beta) you can only register them one at a time; i.e. enter the data, click the "save" button and repeat for each additional note.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=MODS&diff=9502MODS2010-06-17T18:25:11Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Add/edit content]] > [[Add/edit archival descriptions]] > MODS elements<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:mods.png|500px|right|thumb|Editing resource metadata in MODS template]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Identifier ==<br />
<br />
Identifier corresponds to the "identifier" top level element. MODS suggests these values: "hdl, doi, isbn, isrc, ismn, issn, issue number, istc, lccn, local, matrix number, music publisher, music plate, sici, uri, upc, videorecording identifier, stock number."<br />
<br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
Title corresponds to "title" sub-element in "titleInfo" top level element.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Names and origin info (incuding dates) ==<br />
<br />
These [[Glossary#Field|fields]] correspond to "name" and "originInfo" top level elements.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Events in ICA-AtoM ===<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM manages date ranges as [[Glossary#Event|events]] that links an '''actor''' (corporate body, person, or family), described in an authority record, to an [[Glossary#Archival unit|archival unit]] in a type of role (e.g. creator, publisher, contributor, collector, broadcaster, etc.) over a certain period of time. At the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]], the [[Glossary#Archival unit|archival unit]] should always be associated with its [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] over the date range of the material. At lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]], enter the date range only to inherit the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] from the higher [[Glossary#Level of description|level]] (i.e. a description will inherit the creator if "Actor name" is left blank). At any [[Glossary#Level of description|level]] you can associate a description with multiple creators over different date ranges. At any [[Glossary#Level of description|level]] you can assign multiple types of relations; this will be primarily useful at the item level (e.g. date of publication vs creation).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
=== Add a new event ===<br />
<br />
# [[Image:modsEvent1.png|500px|right|thumb|Click the blue Add new link on the left]]Under "Names and origin info" click the blue "Add new" link to add a new event.<br />
# [[Image:modsEvent2.png|500px|right|thumb|Enter data into event dialogue box]]Enter data in the dialogue box as described below. When you are done, click "Submit".<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Actor name ===<br />
<br />
In the "Actor name" field enter the first few letters of the the actor's name. A list of names will appear in the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] (generated from the names of existing [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]). If the name does '''not''' appear in the menu, type the name and a new authority record will be created.<br />
<br />
You can leave the "Actor name" [[Glossary#Field|field]] blank. Lower levels inherit creator information from higher levels: use only if the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]] is different at the lower and higher levels. At the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]], you should always include the [[Glossary#Creator|creator]].<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Event type ===<br />
<br />
Select the type of event from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]: creation, contribution, publication, accumulation, etc.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Value list|value list]] for this [[Glossary#Field|field]] is drawn from the event types [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and can be edited by system [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
=== Place ===<br />
<br />
Select the place of creation, contribution, publication, accumulation etc., if relevant, by typing in the first few letters and then selecting the place from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. If the place name does not appear on the list, type it in and a new place [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date/End date ===<br />
<br />
Enter the Date (i.e. start year) and End date. Do not use any qualifiers here (e.g. "ca.") or typographical symbols (e.g. "[194?]") to express uncertainty (see "Date display", below). If the start and end years are the same, enter data only in the "Date" field and leave the "End date" blank.<br />
<br />
Complete at lower [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]] even if you are leaving the creator name field blank (e.g. when describing a series, you do not need to repeat the creator name from the [[Glossary#Fonds|fonds]] description, but you do need to enter the date range of the series).<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Date display ===<br />
<br />
If desired, enter the date range as you want it to appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. Add any additional text to qualify date range (e.g. "ca. 1940-1980" or "[1940]-1980, predominant 1973-1980").<br />
<br />
Whereas "Date" and "End date" are used internally for database searching and sorting purposes, this [[Glossary#Field|field]] is for display purposes. However, if you do not enter anything into "Date display" the "Date" and "End date" will appear as a date range when the record is saved.<br />
<br />
<br />
=== Event note ===<br />
<br />
Enter any additional information relating to the event.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Type of resource ==<br />
<br />
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] corresponds to the "typeOfResource" top level element. ICA-AtoM provides a data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]] using a [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] to select type derived from the MODS resource type [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] based on the MODS list of enumerated values for this [[Glossary#Field|field]]. This [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] can be edited by [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] and [[Glossary#Editor|editors]] on the list taxonomy terms page. If the [[Glossary#Term|term]] you want to use does not appear on the menu, you (or your system [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] or [[Glossary#Editor|editor]]) must first add it to the [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Add new child levels ==<br />
<br />
See [[add a new archival description]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Language ==<br />
<br />
The language [[Glossary#Field|field]] corresponds to the "language" top level element. ICA-AtoM implements this as a [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. Click on the [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the language from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]; to narrow the list of choices, enter the first few letters of the language. Note that you can add as many languages as you like.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
This [[Glossary#Field|field]] corresponds to the "subject" top level element. Click on the "Subject" [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select a [[Glossary#Term|term]] from the [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]]. You can narrow the list of choices by entering the first few letters of the [[Glossary#Term|term]]. If the subject [[Glossary#Term|term]] does not appear on the list, type it in and a new subject [[Glossary#Term|term]] will be created (note that this works only if you have [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] edit permission).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access conditions ==<br />
<br />
* Corresponds to "accessCondition" to level element.<br />
* MODS suggests values: "restriction on access; use and reproduction."<br />
<br />
<br />
== Repository ==<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
This field is used for indicating which [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] holds the record(s) being described. Select an [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] only at the highest [[Glossary#Level of description|level of description]]; leave this field blank at the lower levels if they are all held by the same institution. It is important to remember this because if an institution is selected for the lower levels then these lower levels will all be displayed in the [[Glossary#Holdings|holdings]] area of an archival institution's [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
Click on the Repository [[Glossary#Field|field]] and select the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] that holds the archival material being described. The names are drawn from pre-existing [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] records. You can narrow down the list of choices by typing in the first few letters of the name. If the name of the institution does not appear in this list, you can type it in and a new [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] record will be created.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Upload_digital_objects&diff=9445Upload digital objects2010-06-16T05:38:39Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Import/export]] > Upload digital objects<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-6.1_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description view page showing reference display copy of the uploaded image]]<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM allows the user to upload [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]], such as scanned images, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. Every [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]] must be associated with an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], typically at the file or item level.<br />
<br />
For every object uploaded, ICA-AtoM creates two derivative objects, a [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] image and a [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
At higher [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]], the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] includes [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of all files registered at lower levels. The [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] are displayed using [[Glossary#Cover flow|cover flow]] so you can easily easily scroll through the set using your keyboard's arrow keys.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
To upload a single [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]],<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
# Click on the "Upload digital object" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
# Click the "Browse" button to navigate to and select a file. Click the "Open" button.<br />
# Click the "Save" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]], the [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] will be displayed in the digital object field. Clicking on the image opens up the [[Glossary#Master digital object|master digital object]] (accessible to authenticated users only).<br />
# Objects with multiple pages, such as multi-page TIFFs or PDF files, will be displayed with a pager to allow the user to browse through the pages; all pages will also appear individually as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of the description to which the object was uploaded.<br />
<br />
You can upload any file format, but only supported formats can be viewed or played directly in ICA-AtoM. For a list of formats, see [[file formats]]. Formats that are not supported can still be uploaded: clicking the object will download it to the user's desktop where (assuming the user has the required software) it can be viewed or played.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Upload multiple files ==<br />
<br />
A user can upload multiple files at once, attaching them all to the same [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]].<br />
<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].<br />
# Click on the "Import digital objects" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]].<br />
# Select a title for the objects; all the objects will have the title plus a number. Currently the default is image 01, image 02, etc.<br />
# Choose a level of description.<br />
# Click the blue "Select files" link and select multiple files to upload. The page will show previews of all the objects.<br />
# If you like you can edit the title for each object next to the preview.<br />
# Click Import in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] you will see that the objects have all been attached to the archival description as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of that description.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9444Glossary2010-06-16T05:36:49Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of filter, such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[file formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9443Glossary2010-06-16T05:36:16Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[Page types#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[file formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9442Glossary2010-06-16T05:35:33Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[file formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9441Glossary2010-06-16T05:34:38Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9440Glossary2010-06-16T05:34:01Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9439Glossary2010-06-16T05:32:52Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area#context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit page|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover flow|cover flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9438Glossary2010-06-16T05:32:12Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area#context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit pages|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover-flow|cover-flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user accounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Translate_content&diff=9437Translate content2010-06-16T05:14:29Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Archival descriptions and terms}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > UM-5.2 Translate descriptions and terms<br />
<br />
<br />
To translate a description or [[Glossary#Term|term]], work through the record ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]]) or [[Glossary#Term|term]] [[Glossary#Field|field]] by [[Glossary#Field|field]] and ensure that all [[Glossary#Field|field]]s that were entered in the original are translated.<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_1.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a description (English to French shown)]]In the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]], click the language into which you want to translate<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Navigate to the description or [[Glossary#Term|term]] you want to translate. In [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]] any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that have already been translated will appear in the language of translation; any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not translated will appear in the source language. Empty [[Glossary#Field|fields]] (no data entered in the original) do not appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the [[Glossary#Title|title]] or [[Glossary#Edit button|edit button]] to switch to [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>For descriptions, open one of the [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]] to access data entry [[Glossary#Field|fields]]. For [[Glossary#Term|terms]] the data entry fields will already be accessible<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Enter the translation in the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]]<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The original source text is highlighted and appears above the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a term (English to French shown)]]Repeat for each [[Glossary#Field|field]] as required<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the "Save" button<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>ICA-AtoM returns you to [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. The translated [[Glossary#Field|fields]] will now appear in the language of translation. Any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not yet translated will continue to appear in the source language.<br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Translate_content&diff=9436Translate content2010-06-16T05:13:51Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Archival descriptions and terms}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > UM-5.2 Translate descriptions and terms<br />
<br />
<br />
To translate a description or [[Glossary#Term|term]], work through the record ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]]) or [[Glossary#Term|term]] [[Glossary#Field|field]] by [[Glossary#Field|field]] and ensure that all [[Glossary#Field|field]]s that were entered in the original are translated.<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_1.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a description (English to French shown)]]In the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]], click the language into which you want to translate<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Navigate to the description or [[Glossary#Term|term]] you want to translate. In [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]] any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that have already been translated will appear in the language of translation; any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not translated will appear in the source language. Empty [[Glossary#Field|fields]] (no data entered in the original) do not appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the [[Glossary#Title|title]] or [[Glossary#Edit button|edit button]] to switch to [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>For descriptions, open one of the [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]] to access data entry [[Glossary#Field|fields]]. For [[Glossary#Term|terms]] the data entry fields will already be accessible<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Enter the translation in the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]]<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The original source text is highlighted and appears above the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a term (English to French shown)]]Repeat for each [[Glossary#Field|field]] as required<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the "Save" button<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>ICA-AtoM returns you to [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. The translated [[Glossary#Field|fields]] will now appear in the language of translation. Any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not yet translated will continue to appear in the [[Glossary#Source language|source language]]<br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Translate_interface&diff=9435Translate interface2010-06-16T05:13:03Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > UM-5.3 Translate interface<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-5.3.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate interface (English to French shown)]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]], [[Glossary#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]], [[Glossary#Title|titles]], [[Glossary#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[Glossary#Field|fields]] and [[Glossary#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, modify, and delete [[Glossary#Database content|database content]].<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>In the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]], click the language into which you are translating. Your selected language will appear underlined. Because you have [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]], the yellow [[Glossary#Translation bar|translation bar]] will appear along the bottom of the page.<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Navigate to the page you wish to translate<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the "Translate user interface" button in the [[Glossary#Translation bar|translation bar]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>ICA-AtoM opens the [[Glossary#Translation panel|translation panel]] in the lower frame of the page. The panel is organized into three columns:<br />
* "Page text" lists all elements for translation; all elements shaded with a yellow background have not yet been translated; elements with no shading (white background) have already been translated and appear in the list under their translated name.<br />
* "Source" is activated when you click an element in column one and shows the name of the element in English<br />
* "Translation" is activated when you click an element in column one and provides the input field for the translation<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Select an element for translation; ICA-AtoM emboldens the selected element<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Add or edit the translation in column three<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>When translation is complete, click or tab out of column three; the element will now appear in column one unshaded and with its translated name<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Continue until all elements on the page have been translated<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Some element names include a number enclosed by percent sign (e.g. "%1%", "%2%"). This is a template token indicating a variable whose value is dynamically generated by the context in which the template is displayed. The template token must be included in the translation. See [[handling complex translation needs]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the "Save" button; ICA-AtoM closes the [[Glossary#Translation panel|translation panel]]. All [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements on the page will now appear in their translations.<br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Translate&diff=9434Translate2010-06-16T05:11:38Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > UM-5 Translate<br />
<br />
<br />
This section describes how to translate both [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] and [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements in ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
These procedures presuppose that you have a [[Glossary#User account|user account]] with at least [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
* [[Multilingual design principles]]<br />
* [[Translate archival descriptions and terms]]<br />
* [[Interface translation]]<br />
* [[Translate pages]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== See also ==<br />
<br />
* [[User roles]] for more on the [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] role<br />
* [[Choose language]] for how switch from the [[Glossary#Default language|default language]] to a preferred language<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9433Glossary2010-06-16T05:06:20Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow|Cover flow]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allows the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title|title]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record, e.g. to edit the "Administrative/biographical history" in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify, or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, edit, and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, add, edit, and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person, or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the context area of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[entity types]] and [[ISAD#Context area#context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF). See [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[ISAD#Context area|context area]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the "Home" link on the [[#User menu|user menu]] or by clicking the [[#Site logo|site logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[choose language]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the "Identity" area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[ISAD#Identity area|identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the media type [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons, and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[ISAD#Access points|access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing, e.g. it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or list page.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit, e.g. the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to add, edit, or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[Manage user accounts#Add a new user|add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[change password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves, and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; e.g. when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child records]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the digital object area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[themes]]).]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Site logo|site logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[Page types#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the digital object [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit pages|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover-flow|cover-flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on "Translate user interface" in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[interface translation]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to add, edit, delete, or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title|title]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]], and [[#Field label|field labels]], and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, edit, and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[user interface labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage user acounts]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#User menu|user menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[user roles]] and [[Manage user accounts#Add a new group|add a new group]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Browse&diff=9432Browse2010-06-16T04:30:29Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Access content]] > Browse<br />
<br />
<br />
Use the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] to browse records by various filters.<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
# [[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu in default Caribou theme]]Click on a filter in the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]]. In the default Caribou theme, the [[Glossary#Browse menu|browse menu]] is a horizontal list directly below the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]]. In the Columbia and Alouette themes, it is a vertical box to the right of the [[Glossary#Search box|search box]].<br />
# [[Image:authoritySearch.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse results: user has clicked on "authority records"]]All the relevant filter terms are displayed on a browse results page. By default, results are displayed ten at a time. Pagination is provided at the bottom of the page to allow users to navigate through long lists of results. [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] can increase or decrease this default number (See [[Global settings#Items per page|items per page]]).<br />
# The default sort order is by most recently updated. Click on Alphabetic to get an alphabetic listing.<br />
# Each filter is described below:<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival descriptions ==<br />
<br />
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]]<br />
<br />
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority records ==<br />
<br />
Displays all [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]]<br />
<br />
"Type" column indicates the type of entity (corporate body, person, or family)<br />
<br />
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institutions ==<br />
<br />
Displays all [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institutions]]<br />
<br />
"Type" column indicates the type of institution (e.g. "Municipal" or "University")<br />
<br />
Click a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]<br />
<br />
<br />
== Functions ==<br />
<br />
List all [[Glossary#Function|functions]]<br />
<br />
Click on a blue link to go to the [[Glossary#Function|function]] [[Glossary#View page|view page]]<br />
<br />
== Subjects ==<br />
<br />
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Subject|subject]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a subject [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]<br />
<br />
Click the subject [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|access point]])<br />
<br />
== Places ==<br />
<br />
Displays all [[Glossary#Term|terms]] in the [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Results column displays the total number of times the [[Glossary#Term|term]] has been used as a [[Glossary#Place|place]] [[Glossary#Access point|access point]] in an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]<br />
<br />
Click the place [[Glossary#Term|term]] to display the ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]] using it as an [[Glossary#Access point|place access point]])<br />
<br />
== Digital objects ==<br />
<br />
Returns all uploaded [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] grouped by "Media type", a metadata element automatically generated when the objects are uploaded (text, image, video etc.)<br />
<br />
Results column displays the total number of [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] of that type<br />
<br />
Click the media type to view [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of the [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]] on a new browse results page<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9431Glossary2010-06-16T04:27:40Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow viewer ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow viewer: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow viwer|Cover flow viewers]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] versions of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allow the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record. Note that the user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record. For example, to edit the ''administrative/biographical history'' in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]] and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, modify and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity Types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the ''context area'' of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity types]] and [[UM-3.1.5|UM-3.1.5 Add / edit archival descriptions > Context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (''ISAD'' glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.4|UM-7.3.4 Customize user interface entity labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's ''International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF)''. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[Archival description: Context area, step 6, Repository]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the ''home'' link on the [[#System menu|system menu]] or by clicking the [[#Application logo|application logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.1|UM-7.3.1 Customize the home and about pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Switch language view]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (''ISAD'' glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the ''identity'' area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[UM-3.1.4|UM-3.1.4 Archival description: Identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[UM-6.1|UM-6.1 Upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[UM-6.1|UM-6.1 Upload digital objects]]. Note that media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the ''media type'' [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[UM-3.1.4#Access_points|UM-3.1.4 Archival description: access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing. For example, it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or [[#List page|list page]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to create, edit or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[UM-7.2.1|UM-7.2.1 Add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[UM-7.2.2|UM-7.2.2 Change your password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[UM-3.1.12|UM3.1.12 Archival description: Physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the grey box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Note that the status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; for example, when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child levels]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the ''digital object'' area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[UM-4|UM-4 Access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Customize Settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Change and configure themes]])]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Change and configure themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Change and configure themes]])]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Application logo|application logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[UM-7.5|UM-7.5 Change and configure themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Edit Taxonomies (terms)]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the ''digital object'' [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit pages|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover-flow viewer|cover-flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on ''translate user interface'' in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate user interface]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to create, modify, delete or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[UM-7.2|UM-7.2 Set up and manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bars]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]] and [[#Field label|field labels]] and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, modify and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.5|UM 7.3.5 Customize user interface entity labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.2|7.2.3 Edit user profile]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#System menu|system menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]] and [[UM-7.2#Add_and_edit_groups|UM-7.2 Set up and manage user accounts: Add and edit groups]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Navigate&diff=9430Navigate2010-06-16T04:25:29Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Access content]] > Navigate: general<br />
<br />
<br />
Navigating involves understanding the current location (entity and page), what can be done from that location (view, edit, add new, search, etc.), how to get related entities, and how to go to other pages to do other things unrelated to the current entity.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] displays what [[Entity types|type of entity]] you are looking at ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]], or [[Glossary#Term|term]]) and what [[Page types|type of page]] you are on ([[Glossary#Edit page|edit]], [[Glossary#View page|view]], import, etc.).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Click on the orange title bar reading "City of New Caledonia Archives" to switch back and forth between the view and edit pages]]<br />
<br />
On a [[Glossary#View page|view]] or [[Glossary#Edit page|edit]] page, the [[Glossary#Title|title]] displays the name of the current entity. You can also click on the [[Glossary#Title|title]] to switch between between [[Glossary#View mode|view]] and [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit]] modes (if you have edit [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|The browse menu in the default Caribou theme is a horizontal list of links directly below the search box]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Text links ==<br />
<br />
Blue text always represents a link to a related entity (e.g. from an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] of the record's [[Glossary#Creator|creator]]). When you hover your cursor over a link, the text is highlighted or underlined.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
Provides a series of links to entities related to the current entity.<br />
<br />
See [[context menu]] for more on this feature as it applies to different [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page links ==<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Site logo|site logo]] and the "home" link in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]] both return you to the [[Glossary#Home page|home page]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] provides access to key functions.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
What appears in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] depends on your [[Glossary#User role|user role]]. For example, the main menu does not appear at all for [[Glossary#Researcher|researchers]] while the translate menu and [[Glossary#Admin menu|admin menu]] appear only to users with [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
== Column headers ==<br />
<br />
[[Glossary#Column header|Column headers]] appear on list pages, giving the names of the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for whatever is listed below.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Navigate&diff=9429Navigate2010-06-16T04:24:27Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Access content]] > Navigate: general<br />
<br />
<br />
Navigating involves understanding the current location (entity and page), what can be done from that location (view, edit, add new, search, etc.), how to get related entities, and how to go to other pages to do other things unrelated to the current entity.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] displays what [[Entity types|type of entity]] you are looking at ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]], or [[Glossary#Term|term]]) and what [[Page types|type of page]] you are on ([[Glossary#Edit page|edit]], [[Glossary#View page|view]], import, etc.).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Click on the orange title bar reading "City of New Caledonia Archives" to switch back and forth between the view and edit pages]]<br />
<br />
On a [[Glossary#View page|view]] or [[Glossary#Edit page|edit]] page, the [[Glossary#Title|title]] displays the name of the current entity. You can also click on the [[Glossary#Title|title]] to switch between between [[Glossary#View mode|view]] and [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit]] modes (if you have edit [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|The browse menu in the default Caribou theme is a horizontal list of links directly below the search box]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Text links ==<br />
<br />
Blue text always represents a link to a related entity (e.g. from an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] of the record's [[Glossary#Creator|creator]]). When you hover your cursor over a link, the text is highlighted or underlined.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
Provides a series of links to entities related to the current entity.<br />
<br />
See [[context menu]] for more on this feature as it applies to different [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page links ==<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Site logo|site logo]] and the "home" link in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]] both return you to the [[Glossary#Home page|home page]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] provides access to key functions.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
What appears in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] depends on your [[Glossary#User role|user role]]. For example, the main menu does not appear at all for [[Glossary#Researcher|researchers]] while the translate menu and [[Glossary#Admin menu|admin menu]] appear only to users with [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
== Column headers ==<br />
<br />
[[Glossary#Column header|Column headers]] appear on list pages, giving the names of the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for whatever is listed below.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Navigate&diff=9428Navigate2010-06-16T04:22:46Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Access content]] > Navigate: general<br />
<br />
<br />
Navigating involves understanding the current location (entity and page), what can be done from that location (view, edit, add new, search, etc.), how to get related entities, and how to go to other pages to do other things unrelated to the current entity.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] displays what [[Entity types|type of entity]] you are looking at ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]], or [[Glossary#Term|term]]) and what [[Page types|type of page]] you are on ([[Glossary#Edit page|edit]], [[Glossary#View page|view]], import, etc.).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Click on the orange title bar reading "City of New Caledonia Archives" to switch back and forth between the view and edit pages]]<br />
<br />
On a [[Glossary#View page|view]] or [[Glossary#Edit page|edit]] page, the [[Glossary#Title|title]] displays the name of the current entity. You can also click on the [[Glossary#Title|title]] to switch between between [[Glossary#View mode|view]] and [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit]] modes (if you have edit [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|The browse menu in the default Caribou theme is a horizontal list of links directly below the search box]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Search box|search box]] is available on every page: enter a query and click on the magnifying glass icon or press Enter on your keyboard<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
Be careful when launching a search from the [[Glossary#Edit page|edit page]]: '''always be sure to first save your changes, or else these will be lost when the search/browse occurs.'''<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Text links ==<br />
<br />
Blue text always represents a link to a related entity (e.g. from an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] to the [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]] of the record's [[Glossary#Creator|creator]]). When you hover your cursor over a link, the text is highlighted or underlined.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
Provides a series of links to entities related to the current entity.<br />
<br />
See [[context menu]] for more on this feature as it applies to different [[entity types]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page links ==<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Site logo|site logo]] and the "home" link in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]] both return you to the [[Glossary#Home page|home page]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] provides access to key functions.<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
What appears in the [[Glossary#Main menu|main menu]] depends on your [[Glossary#User role|user role]]. For example, the main menu does not appear at all for [[Glossary#Researcher|researchers]] while the [[Glossary#Translate menu item|translate menu item]] and [[Glossary#Admin menu item|admin menu item]] appear only to users with [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] and [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
== Column headers ==<br />
<br />
[[Glossary#Column header|Column headers]] appear on list pages, giving the names of the [[Glossary#Field|fields]] for whatever is listed below.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]<br />
<br />
__NOTOC__</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Multilingual_design_principles&diff=9427Multilingual design principles2010-06-16T04:19:55Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Design principles}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > UM-5.1 Design principles<br />
<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM is a multilingual application which incorporates the following design principles:<br />
* Both the [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] and the [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] should be capable of existing in multiple languages<br />
* Users should be able to switch the [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] to their preferred language<br />
* When switching the [[Glossary#User interface|interface]] to a preferred language, [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] should also switch, if a translation is available; if not, the content remains in the source language<br />
* Users with [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]] should be able to contribute translations of [[Glossary#User interface|interface]] elements and descriptions from the source language to any of the [[Glossary#Supported language|supported languages]]<br />
* [[Glossary#Administrator|Administrators]] should be able to remove languages that are not needed in their application; they should be able to easily add back [[Glossary#Supported language|supported languages]] that were removed<br />
* Over time, it should be easy to add new languages to the [[Glossary#Supported language|supported languages]]<br />
<br />
When installing ICA-AtoM, the [[Glossary#Administrator|administrator]] specifies the [[Glossary#Default language|default language]]. Any user can switch the [[Glossary#Current language|current language]] to display the [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] in any of the other [[Glossary#Supported language|supported languages]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM makes no attempt to automatically generate "translations" from one language to another. It is up to individual translators to do the translations. ICA-AtoM does not "do" translation, rather it supports the activities of translators by providing a structure in which users can contribute translations of descriptions and link these back to the originals.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Known issues ==<br />
<br />
All users with [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]] can add or edit translations of both [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] in any of the [[Glossary#Supported language|supported languages]]. In future releases, [[Glossary#Translator|translator]] [[Glossary#Access privilege|access privileges]] should be limited by both language and type of translation; for example, a translator may be restricted to translating only [[Glossary#Database content|database content]] into only one language.<br />
<br />
There is currently no way for system [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] to add new languages to ICA-AtoM via normal web-browser interaction. New languages can only be added by programmers working directly with the code. In future releases, [[Glossary#Administrator|administrators]] will be able to add new languages to those supported by their application and to make their translations of the [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] available to the wider community of ICA-AtoM users.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Glossary&diff=9426Glossary2010-06-16T04:17:41Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>This page provides definitions of terms used throughout ICA-AtoM's system and user documentation.<br />
<br />
<br />
== About page ==<br />
<br />
The about page provides general information on ICA-AtoM. It can be reached via the [[#User menu|user menu]] in the top right-hand corner of the page. The content of the about page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access point ==<br />
<br />
An access point is "A name, term, keyword, phrase or code that may be used to search, identify and locate an archival description." (ISAD glossary). In ICA-AtoM, access points are derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] created and customized by users. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Access privilege ==<br />
<br />
Access privileges control the ways a user is able to interact with ICA-AtoM. For example, some users are able to add and edit content while others may only be able to search and browse content. Access privileges are based on defined [[#User role|user roles]] (see [[user roles]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Add menu]]<br />
<br />
The "Add" menu allows authorized users to add new [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]], and [[Glossary#Function|functions]]. Only authenticated users can see the "Add" menu.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Add new button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Add new button in archival description button block - top center]]<br />
<br />
The add new button is located in the [[#Button block|button block]] of the [[#View page|view page]] and allows users to add new records ([[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]) to ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Admin menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:adminMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Admin menu]]<br />
<br />
The admin menu allows users with [[#Administrator|administrator]] access to customize ICA-AtoM to meet institution-specific requirements and to manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Administrator ==<br />
<br />
The administrator is a type of user who has [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] to do the following: install or uninstall ICA-AtoM; create, read, update, or delete any record; customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements; and manage [[#User account|user accounts]] and [[#User profile|user profiles]] (see [[user roles]] and [[administer]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival description ==<br />
<br />
An archival description is a body of information about an archival record or records. The descriptions provide contextual information about the archival materials and are arranged into hierarchical levels ([[#Fonds|fonds]], series, files, items, and variations of these in accordance with institutional standards). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used for describing archival records are derived from the ICA's General International Standard Archival Description (ISAD). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival institution ==<br />
<br />
An archival institution is "An organization which keeps and preserves archival material and makes it accessible to the public" (ISDIAH glossary). In ICA-AtoM the [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe such institutions are based on the ICA's International Standard for Describing Institutions with Archival Holdings (ISDIAH). See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Archival unit ==<br />
<br />
Archival unit is a generic term for an aggregation of archival materials. A unit can be a [[#Fonds|fonds]], series, file, item, or variation thereof, depending on institutional standards. A unit may be divided into sub-units for the purposes of description: e.g. a [[#Fonds|fonds]] may contain several series, each of which may contain several files, and so forth. The smallest (and therefore indivisible) unit is the item.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Authority record ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, authority records are collections of information about actors - corporate bodies, persons, or families - who interact with archival materials, typically as [[#Creator|creators]]. The [[#Data element|data elements]] used to describe authority records are based on the ICA's International Standard Archival Authority Record for Corporate Bodies, Persons and Families (ISAAR). ISAAR defines authority record as "The authorized form of name combined with othr information elements that identify and describe the named entity and may also point to other related authority records." See [[entity types]] and [[add/edit authority records]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Browse menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Browse menu just below the search box in the default Caribou theme]]<br />
<br />
Browsing allows a user to see all records that have a certain type of [[#Access point|access point]] (such as [[#Subject|subject]], [[#Name|name]], or [[#Place|place]]) or other type of [[#Filter|filter]], such as [[#Media type|media type]] or type of [[#Entity|entity]]. In ICA-AtoM's default theme (the Caribou theme) the browse menu appears in a horizontal row below the [[#Search box|search box]]; in the Alouette and Columbia themes the browse menu is displayed in a vertical box above and to the right of the [[#Search box|search box]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Button block ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Button block - archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
The button block allows authorized users to add or delete content and to save or reject changes made in the [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. It appears at the bottom of the page and is designed to float (i.e. remain at the bottom of the page when the user scrolls up or down in the browser window).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Child record ==<br />
<br />
Child record refers to a description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] lower than the current unit, e.g. if a series belongs to a fonds, the series is the child record of the fonds.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Collection ==<br />
<br />
In ISAD, a collection is "[a]n artificial assemblage of documents accumulated on the basis of some common characteristic without regard to the provenance of those documents. Not to be confused with an archival fonds." In Rules for Archival Description, it is "[a] grouping of documents of any provenance intentionally assembled on the basis of some common characteristic." In Dublin Core, a collection is "[a]n aggregation of resources. A collection is described as a group; its parts may also be separately described."<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Column header ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:columnHeader.png|500px|right|thumb|Column header (the orange bar at the top of the list)]]<br />
<br />
Column headers appear at the top of the lists on list pages and [[#Browse results|browse results]] and give the name of the [[#Field|field]] for whatever is being listed below.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Context menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:contextMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu for an archival description showing archival institution, name of creator and other records in the same fonds]]<br />
<br />
The context menu appears on all [[#View page|view]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]] to show the current record's relationships to other records, with links, e.g. they show the hierarchical placement of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] within a [[#Fonds|fonds]] and the relationship between [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and archival holdings. See [[context menu]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Contributor ==<br />
<br />
A contributor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, and edit descriptions. See [[user roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Controlled vocabulary ==<br />
<br />
A controlled vocabulary is a set of pre-defined, authorized [[#Term|terms]] grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] or entered into [[#Authority record|authority records]] and used for generating [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Cover flow viewer ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:coverFlow.png|500px|right|thumb|Cover flow viewer: scroll through the images by moving the black dot or by using your keyboard arrows]]<br />
<br />
[[wikipedia:Cover flow viwer|Cover flow viewers]] show sets of [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] versions of [[#Digital object|digital objects]] and allow the user to scroll through the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] using a mouse or keyboard scroll arrows. In ICA-AtoM a cover flow viewer appears in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] whenever there are associated lower-level descriptions that have digital objects attached.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Create button ==<br />
<br />
The create button, located on the [[#Button block|button block]], is used to save new [[#Entity|entities]]. Once an entity has been saved for the first time, the create button disappears and is replaced by the "Save" button, which is used to save all subsequent changes.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Creator ==<br />
<br />
A creator is "Any entity (corporate body, family or person) that created, accumulated and/or maintained records in the conduct of personal or corporate activity" (ISAAR glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the creator is described in an [[#Authority record|authority record]] linked to an [[#Archival description|archival description]], usually at the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]] only. Lower levels inherit the creator from the [[#Parent record|parent record]], unless a different creator is specified. ICA-AtoM can accommodate multiple creators at all [[#Level of description|levels of description]]. See [[ISAD#Context area|context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Current language ==<br />
<br />
Refers to the language in which the [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and [[#Database content|database content]] are displayed. Users can switch between languages by using the [[#Language menu|language menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Data element ==<br />
<br />
Data elements, or elements of description, are ICA standards-based units of information applied to [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], and [[#Term|terms]]. The elements are entered into [[#Field|fields]] in ICA-AtoM's [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Database content ==<br />
<br />
Database content refers to information stored in ICA-Atom's database tables, including [[#Data element|data elements]], [[#Static page|static page]] content, and [[#User profile|user profile]] information.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Default content ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:defaultContent.png|500px|right|thumb|Default values for levels of description. These can be modified to suit institutional requirements.]]<br />
<br />
Default content is any [[#Database content|database content]] that is included by default when ICA-AtoM is installed. This includes things like the default [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menu]] values that are stored in [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Default language ==<br />
<br />
The default source language is the language in which all [[#User interface|user interface]] elements are displayed when ICA-AtoM is opened. The language is specified when the application is installed. Users can switch to other [[#Supported language|supported languages]] and [[#Translator|translators]] can translate [[#Database content|database content]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[choose language]] and [[translate]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete button in archival description button block - second from left on the top]]<br />
<br />
The delete button appears in the [[#Button block|button block]] that is is visible whenever the user opens an [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Clicking on the delete button will prompt a warning to appear asking whether the user really intends to delete the [[#Entity|entity]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Delete icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:deleteIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Delete icons to the right of data entry fields: click on the X to delete the content]]<br />
<br />
Delete icons are small buttons in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] used to delete values from [[#Multi-value field|multi-value fields]], such as those containing [[#Event|event]] dates or [[#Access point|access points]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Developer ==<br />
<br />
A developer is a programmer who is able to modify the underlying software code of an ICA-AtoM application. In the beta version of ICA-AtoM (1.0), much of the customization of the application can only be done by developers. In future releases of the software, more and more features will be customizable via [[#User interface|user interface]] elements available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Digital object ==<br />
<br />
Digital objects are computer files that can be uploaded into and displayed by ICA-AtoM. They include scanned images, digital photographs, sound and moving image files and other scanned or born-digital items. See [[upload digital objects]] and [[supported formats]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Draft record ==<br />
<br />
A draft record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has not been published. All new and imported [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have draft status until the user changes that status to published in the gray box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. Users who are not authenticated cannot view draft records.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Drop-down menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|A drop-down menu in an edit page]]<br />
<br />
A [[wikipedia:Drop-down list|drop-down list]] is a list of data-entry options that appears below certain [[#Field|fields]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. Values are drawn from [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] and default data contained in ICA-AtoM's database tables.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit button ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:archDescButtonBlockSmall.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit button in archival description button block - top left]]<br />
<br />
The edit button appears at the bottom of [[#View page|view pages]]; clicking the button takes the user to the [[#Edit page|edit page]] for that record. Note that the user can also switch between view and edit pages by clicking the [[#Title bar|title bar]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit icon ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editIcon.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit icon: click on the the little pencil to edit the data]]<br />
<br />
The edit icon appears in [[#Edit page|edit pages]] next to [[#Field|fields]] that derive data from a related record. The user clicks the icon to edit the text in the related record. For example, to edit the ''administrative/biographical history'' in an [[#Archival description|archival description]], the user must click the edit icon because the data resides in the [[#Creator|creator's]] [[#Authority record|authority record]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Edit mode ==<br />
<br />
Edit mode allows the user to add, modify or delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]], [[#Term|terms]] and other [[#Database content|database content]] using [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In edit mode, ICA-AtoM displays all [[#Field|fields]] in a record for data entry.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Edit page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:editPage1.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page for an archival institution: Identity area expanded]]<br />
<br />
Edit pages allow users to add, modify and delete the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. They are also used to carry out administrative functions such as changing [[#User profile|user profiles]] and editing [[#Static page|static pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Editor ==<br />
<br />
An editor is a type of user who can search, browse, create, edit and delete [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Entity ==<br />
<br />
An entity is an object about which an information system collects data. From the user's perspective, in ICA-AtoM there are four main entities: [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Term|terms]]. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity Types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Error message ==<br />
<br />
An error message will display when ICA-AtoM is unable to execute an action. See [[Page types#Error|error]] for examples of types of error messages.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Event ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, an event registers an action by an actor (corporate body, person or family) at a particular time or over a span of time and may establish a relationship between the actor and other actors or [[#Entity|entities]]. This is accomplished through the use of start and end dates in the ''context area'' of the [[#Archival description|archival description]], which links the [[#Creator|creator]] or other actor to the records for the period of time delimited by the dates. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity types]] and [[UM-3.1.5|UM-3.1.5 Add / edit archival descriptions > Context area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Field ==<br />
<br />
A field is a container for a [[#Data element|data element]]. Content is added to or modified in fields in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Field label ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:fieldLabel.png|500px|right|thumb|Field labels appear in the grey area to the left of the content in the archival description view page]]<br />
<br />
Field labels identify [[#Field|fields]] in [[#View page|view pages]] and [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. In ICA-AtoM 1.0 beta, field labels can only be customized by developers working directly with the code; in a future release an interface for customizing labels will be available to [[#Administrator|administrators]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Fonds ==<br />
<br />
Fonds is an [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] defined as "The whole of the records, regardless of form or medium, organically created and/or accumulated and used by a particular person, family, or corporate body in the course of that creator's activities and functions." (''ISAD'' glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the fonds is by default the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]. This default can be changed by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.4|UM-7.3.4 Customize user interface entity labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Function ==<br />
<br />
A function is a type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] that describes activities linked to records creation, maintenance and use. Functions in ICA-AtoM are linked to [[Glossary#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority records]] and other functions. In ICA-AtoM the [[Glossary#Data field|data fields]] for describing functions are taken from the ICA's ''International Standard for Describing Functions (ISDF)''. See [[UM-1.3|UM-1.3 Entity types]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Holdings ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|Context menu showing list of archival holdings as blue links on the right of the page]]<br />
<br />
Holdings is a generic term referring to the records and other materials held by [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]]. In ICA-AtoM a list of holdings is displayed in the [[#Context menu|context menu]] on [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] [[#View page|view pages]]. The list is generated from the titles of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] that have the [[#Archival institution|archival institution]] selected as a repository (see [[Archival description: Context area, step 6, Repository]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Home page ==<br />
<br />
The home page is the first page the user sees when opening the ICA-AtoM application. It can also be accessed via the ''home'' link on the [[#System menu|system menu]] or by clicking the [[#Application logo|application logo]]. The content of the home page can be edited by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.1|UM-7.3.1 Customize the home and about pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Information area ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:infoArea.png|500px|right|thumb|Edit page showing information areas: Identity area, Context area, Content and structure area, etc.]]<br />
<br />
Information areas appear on [[#Edit page|edit pages]] and group related [[#Field|fields]] based on the organization of elements of description in ICA descriptive standards. Clicking on an information area toggles it between closed (all [[#Field|fields]] in that area hidden) and open (all [[#Field|fields]] visible).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Language menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Language menu at the top left of the page above the application logo: English selected]]<br />
<br />
The language menu, located in the top-left corner of the page, allows the user to switch to any of the [[#Supported language|supported languages]] in ICA-AtoM. The current language is always underlined. See [[Switch language view]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Level of description ==<br />
<br />
The level of description is "the position of the unit of description in the hierarchy of the fonds" (''ISAD'' glossary). In ICA-AtoM, the level of description is selected from a [[#Value list|value list]] in the ''identity'' area of an [[#Archival description|archival description]]. See [[UM-3.1.4|UM-3.1.4 Archival description: Identity area]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Main menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:addMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|Main menu with Add menu expanded]]<br />
<br />
The main menu is the the navigational tool located near the top of all pages for authenticated users, right below the [[#Search box|search box]]. It allows the user to navigate to all the main areas of ICA-AtoM.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Master digital object ==<br />
<br />
The master digital object is the unaltered version of a [[#Digital object|digital object]] that has been uploaded to ICA-AtoM. ICA-AtoM automatically generates a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and a [[#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] of the object. Only authenticated users may view master digital objects. See [[UM-6.1|UM-6.1 Upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Media type ==<br />
<br />
Media type refers to the format of uploaded [[#Digital object|digital objects]]. The media type is selected automatically by ICA-AtoM when a digital object is uploaded and the [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and [[#Reference display copy|reference display copies]] of the object are generated. See [[UM-6.1|UM-6.1 Upload digital objects]]. Note that media type [[#Term|terms]] are controlled by the ''media type'' [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]]. ICA-AtoM ships with five [[#Term|terms]] (audio, image, text, video, other) that are locked; these cannot be edited or deleted because they are referenced by ICA-AtoM's code. [[#Editor|Editors]] and [[#Administrator|administrators]] can add new media type [[#Term|terms]], but unless developers incorporate these into the code, the system will not be able to do anything with them.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Multi-repository system ==<br />
<br />
A multi-repository system exists when a single instance of ICA-AtoM is used by a [[#Network|network]] of [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Multi-value field ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Multi-value field.png|500px|right|thumb|Multi-value field showing three subject terms in an archival description.]]<br />
<br />
A multi-value field is a [[#Field|field]] that is structured to contain more than one data entry.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Name ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, names are registered in [[#Authority record|authority records]] for corporate bodies, persons and families who interact with archival materials as e.g. [[#Creator|creators]], custodians and publishers. Names can be applied as access points to archival descriptions. See [[UM-3.1.4#Access_points|UM-3.1.4 Archival description: access points]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Network ==<br />
<br />
A network is an aggregation of institutions using one instance of ICA-AtoM to produce a union list of archival holdings (a [[#Multi-repository system|multi-repository system]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Page title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:holdings.png|500px|right|thumb|The light grey text which says "View Archival institution" is the page title]]<br />
<br />
The page title indicates what kind of page a user is viewing. For example, it indicates whether [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] or [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] are being displayed in a [[#View page|view page]], [[#Edit page|edit page]], or [[#List page|list page]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Parent record ==<br />
<br />
The parent record refers to the description of the [[#Archival unit|archival unit]] that is one [[#Level of description|level of description]] higher than the current unit. For example, the parent record of a sub-series is the series to which it belongs.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Password ==<br />
<br />
Passwords are required by every user of the system who needs to be able to create, edit or delete content. The initial passwords are set by the [[#Administrator|system administrator]] (see [[UM-7.2.1|UM-7.2.1 Add a new user]]) and can subsequently be changed by the user (see [[UM-7.2.2|UM-7.2.2 Change your password]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Place ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a place is a geographic location registered in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as an [[#Access point|access point]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Physical storage ==<br />
<br />
Physical storage is a grouping of [[#Field|fields]] relating to the management of physical objects such as folders, boxes, shelves and cabinets. In ICA-AtoM, users can create and edit information about physical objects in the physical storage [[#Edit page|edit page]] accessible through the physical storage [[#Information area|information area]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], and link the objects to the [[#Archival unit|archival units]] they contain. See [[UM-3.1.12|UM3.1.12 Archival description: Physical storage]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Published record ==<br />
<br />
A published record is an [[#Archival description|archival description]] that has had its status changed from draft to published in the grey box at the bottom of the [[#Archival description|archival description]] [[#Edit page|edit page]]. Note that the status is inherited from the highest [[#Level of description|level of description]]; for example, when a [[#Fonds|fonds]] description is changed from draft to published, all [[#Child record|child levels]] within the fonds are automatically changed as well. Once [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]] have been published, users who are not authenticated can view them.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Reference display copy ==<br />
<br />
A reference display copy is a low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. It is used to display images on the [[#Digital object|digital object]] [[#View page|view page]] when the user clicks on a [[#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] and in the ''digital object'' area of [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. See [[upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Researcher ==<br />
<br />
A researcher is a type of user who is limited to searching and browsing descriptions. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Search box ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Search box - the user enters a query and clicks on the magnifying glass icon]]<br />
<br />
The search box is used to find descriptions in ICA-AtoM that contain text matching a search query. The search box is located on the right hand side of all ICA-AtoM pages, including the [[#Home page|home page]]. See [[UM-4|UM-4 Access content]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Setting ==<br />
<br />
Settings is a broad term used to describe the properties that affect the way a program looks and functions. In ICA-AtoM, certain settings can be changed by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] in order to customize ICA-AtoM to institution-specific requirements. See [[Customize Settings]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site description ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site description reading "Historic Archives of the District of New Caledonia, British Columbia". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Change and configure themes]])]]<br />
<br />
The site description appears at the top of the page directly under the [[#Site title|site title]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[Change and configure themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site logo ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:browseOptions.png|500px|right|thumb|Default red and white site logo]]<br />
<br />
The site logo is the graphic that appears at the top of all pages in ICA-AtoM. Clicking on the logo will take the user to the [[#Home page|home page]]. ICA-AtoM ships with a default logo that can be replaced by [[#Administrator|administrators]] to theme the application to their own institution or [[#Network|network]] if desired. See [[change logo]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Site title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:siteTitle.png|500px|right|thumb|Site title reading "New Caledonia Archives". Note use of Columbia theme (see [[Change and configure themes]])]]<br />
<br />
The site title appears at the top of the page next to the [[#Application logo|application logo]] and over the [[#Site description|site description]]. It is a configurable element - the text can be changed or removed (see [[UM-7.5|UM-7.5 Change and configure themes]]).<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Static page ==<br />
<br />
Static pages are pages that are designed to look the same each time they are accessed, in contrast to dynamic pages such as [[#Search results|search results]], [[#View page|view pages]], or [[#Edit page|edit pages]]. ICA-AtoM has two static pages, the [[#Home page|home page]] and the [[#About page|about page]]. Static pages can be edited by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] (see [[manage pages]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== Subject ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, subjects are [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] grouped in a [[#Taxonomy|taxonomy]] and used as [[#Access point|access points]] in [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Supported language ==<br />
<br />
In ICA-AtoM, a supported language is one into which both [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface |user interface]] elements can be translated. In ICA-AtoM version 1.0 beta, the supported languages are Arabic, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Greek, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Slovenian.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Taxonomy ==<br />
<br />
A taxonomy is a grouping of [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled-vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] used to generate [[#Value list|value lists]] and [[#Access point|access points]]. See [[Edit Taxonomies (terms)]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Term ==<br />
<br />
Terms are the values that make up [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabularies]]. In ICA-AtoM, terms are grouped into [[#Taxonomy|taxonomies]] that can be added, edited, and deleted through the "Term" item of the [[#Add menu|add menu]]. See [[add/edit terms]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== Thumbnail ==<br />
<br />
A thumbnail is a small, low-resolution version of a [[#Master digital object|master digital object]] generated automatically by ICA-AtoM on upload. Thumbnails are displayed on [[#View page|view pages]], in the ''digital object'' [[#Information area|information area]] of [[#Edit pages|edit pages]], and in [[#Cover-flow viewer|cover-flow]] views at higher levels of description. See [[Upload digital objects]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Title ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:titleBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Title bar in an archival description show page reading "Fonds PR-84 - New Caledonia City Clerk fonds"]]<br />
<br />
The title appears at the top of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions]], [[#Authority record|authority records]], and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation bar ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:translationBar.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation bar]]<br />
<br />
The translation bar appears at the bottom of the page when users with [[#Translator|translator]] [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] select a language from the [[#Language menu|language menu]]. Clicking on ''translate user interface'' in the bottom right-hand corner of the bar opens up the [[#Translation panel|translation panel]], where the user translates [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[Translate user interface]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Translation panel ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:G Translation panel.png|500px|right|thumb|Translation panel]]<br />
<br />
The translation panel is used by [[#Translator|translators]] to edit [[#User interface|user interface]] elements and is accessed via the [[#Translation bar|translation bar]]. See [[Translate interface]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== Translator ==<br />
<br />
A translator is a type of user who can translate [[#Data element|data elements]] and [[#User interface|user interface]] elements. See [[User roles]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User account ==<br />
<br />
User accounts are established in order to manage [[#Access privilege|access privileges]] through the assignment of [[#User role|user roles]]. Every user who must be able to create, modify, delete or translate content must have a user account. In ICA-AtoM user accounts are established and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]]. See [[UM-7.2|UM-7.2 Set up and manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User interface ==<br />
<br />
The user interface is the set of elements that allow the user to interact with the ICA-AtoM application. These elements include the [[#Main menu|main menu]], [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]], [[#Context menu|context menu]], [[#Title bar|title bars]], [[#Column header|column headers]], buttons, [[#Field|fields]] and [[#Field label|field labels]] and any other elements used to navigate ICA-AtoM or to search for, view, add, modify and delete [[#Database content|database content]]. The labels of some user interface elements can be customized by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.3.5|UM 7.3.5 Customize user interface entity labels]]).<br />
<br />
<br />
== User menu ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:languageMenu.png|500px|right|thumb|User menu in upper right-hand corner of the page (user is not authenticated)]]<br />
<br />
The user menu, located in the upper right hand corner of the page, contains basic navigational links. These allow the user to go to the [[#Home page|home page]] and [[#About page|about page]], user documentation (help pages) and the log in page. Authenticated users can also use it to navigate to their [[#User profile|user profiles]].<br />
<br />
== Username ==<br />
<br />
The username is a name supplied by an [[#Administrator|administrator]] to any user (other than a [[#Researcher|researcher]]) of the ICA-AtoM application as part of the [[#User account|user account]]. See [[Manage user accounts]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User profile ==<br />
<br />
A user profile is information about a user managed in a [[#User account|user account]]. User profiles are created and maintained by [[#Administrator|administrators]] (see [[UM-7.2|7.2.3 Edit user profile]]), although authenticated users can view their own profiles (and change their [[#Password|passwords]]) by going through the [[#System menu|system menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
== User role ==<br />
<br />
User roles define levels of access to functions in ICA-AtoM, ranging from view-only access to full administration rights. User roles are defined by groups that an [[#Administrator|administrator]] can add and edit. See [[UM-2.3|UM-2.3 User roles]] and [[UM-7.2#Add_and_edit_groups|UM-7.2 Set up and manage user accounts: Add and edit groups]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== Value list ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:valueList.png|500px|right|thumb|Value list derived from Levels of description taxonomy]]<br />
<br />
Value lists restrict data entry in certain [[#Field|fields]] to [[#Controlled vocabulary|controlled vocabulary]] [[#Term|terms]] or terms derived from [[#Authority record|authority records]]. They appear as [[#Drop-down menu|drop-down menus]] in [[#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
== View mode ==<br />
<br />
View mode provides read-only access to the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]] and [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] using [[#View page|view pages]]. In view mode, ICA-AtoM displays only those [[#Field|fields]] in a record which contain data.<br />
<br />
<br />
<div class="clearfix"><br />
<br />
== View page ==<br />
<br />
[[Image:viewPage.png|500px|right|thumb|View page for an archival description]]<br />
<br />
View pages allow users to view in detail the contents of [[#Archival description|archival descriptions,]] [[#Authority record|authority records]], [[#Archival institution|archival institutions]] and [[#Functions|functions]]<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Translate_content&diff=9425Translate content2010-06-16T04:17:26Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Archival descriptions and terms}}<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > UM-5.2 Translate descriptions and terms<br />
<br />
<br />
To translate a description or [[Glossary#Term|term]], work through the record ([[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]], [[Glossary#Archival institution|archival institution]]) or [[Glossary#Term|term]] [[Glossary#Field|field]] by [[Glossary#Field|field]] and ensure that all [[Glossary#Field|field]]s that were entered in the original are translated.<br />
<br />
<ol><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_1.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a description (English to French shown)]]In the [[Glossary#Language menu|language menu]], click the language into which you want to translate<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Navigate to the description or [[Glossary#Term|term]] you want to translate. In [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]] any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] that have already been translated will appear in the language of translation; any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not translated will appear in the source language. Empty [[Glossary#Field|fields]] (no data entered in the original) do not appear in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the [[Glossary#Title bar|title bar]] or [[Glossary#Edit button|edit button]] to switch to [[Glossary#Edit mode|edit mode]]<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>For descriptions, open one of the [[Glossary#Information area|information areas]] to access data entry [[Glossary#Field|fields]]. For [[Glossary#Term|terms]] the data entry fields will already be accessible<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Enter the translation in the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]]<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
The original source text is highlighted and appears above the data entry [[Glossary#Field|field]].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>[[Image:UM-5.2_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Translate a term (English to French shown)]]Repeat for each [[Glossary#Field|field]] as required<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>Click the "Save" button<br />
<br />
<li><br />
<br />
<p>ICA-AtoM returns you to [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]. The translated [[Glossary#Field|fields]] will now appear in the language of translation. Any [[Glossary#Field|fields]] not yet translated will continue to appear in the [[Glossary#Source language|source language]]<br />
<br />
</ol><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Handling_complex_translation_needs&diff=9424Handling complex translation needs2010-06-16T04:14:40Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > [[UM-5.3|UM-5.3 Translate interface]] > UM-5.3.1 Translate template tokens<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-5.3.1.png|500px|right|thumb|Some interface element names include template tokens]]<br />
<br />
The names of some [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements include tokens which are variables whose value is determined dynamically by the context. Tokens are represented by a number enclosed in percent signs (e.g. "%1%"). Tokens must be included in the translation, but because different languages have different grammar rules, translators need to be aware of the type of information being handled in any given variable in any given context.<br />
<br />
http://www.symfony-project.org/book/1_2/13-I18n-and-L10n#chapter_13_sub_handling_complex_translation_needs<br />
<br />
The table below enumerates in English the elements whose names include tokens and for each gives a brief explanation of the nature of the variable and the context in which it occurs.<br />
<br />
<table><br />
<thead><br />
<tr><br />
<th><br />
Element name<br />
</th><th><br />
Variable<br />
</th><th><br />
Context<br />
</tr><br />
</thead><tbody><br />
<tr><br />
<td><br />
%1% profile<br />
</td><td><br />
User's account name<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the user's account name in the [[Glossary#User menu|user menu]]; clicked by the user to edit his or her [[Glossary#User profile|user profile]]; appears on all pages.<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
List all %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]); appears as part of text on the list all button on [[Glossary#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
Edit %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] on [[Glossary#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
List %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival institution]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] on list pages.<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
View %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] on [[Glossary#View page|view pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><br />
</tbody><br />
</table><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Handling_complex_translation_needs&diff=9423Handling complex translation needs2010-06-16T04:13:32Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[UM-5|UM-5 Translate content / interface]] > [[UM-5.3|UM-5.3 Translate interface]] > UM-5.3.1 Translate template tokens<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-5.3.1.png|500px|right|thumb|Some interface element names include template tokens]]<br />
<br />
The names of some [[Glossary#User interface|user interface]] elements include tokens which are variables whose value is determined dynamically by the context. Tokens are represented by a number enclosed in percent signs (e.g. "%1%"). Tokens must be included in the translation, but because different languages have different grammar rules, translators need to be aware of the type of information being handled in any given variable in any given context.<br />
<br />
http://www.symfony-project.org/book/1_2/13-I18n-and-L10n#chapter_13_sub_handling_complex_translation_needs<br />
<br />
The table below enumerates in English the elements whose names include tokens and for each gives a brief explanation of the nature of the variable and the context in which it occurs.<br />
<br />
<table><br />
<thead><br />
<tr><br />
<th><br />
Element name<br />
</th><th><br />
Variable<br />
</th><th><br />
Context<br />
</tr><br />
</thead><tbody><br />
<tr><br />
<td><br />
%1% profile<br />
</td><td><br />
User's account name<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the user's account name in the [[Glossary#System menu|system menu]]; clicked by the user to edit his or her [[Glossary#User profile|user profile]]; appears on all pages.<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
List all %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]); appears as part of text on the list all button on [[Glossary#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
Edit %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Authority record|authority record]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title]] on [[Glossary#Edit page|edit pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
List %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival institution]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] on list pages.<br />
</td><br />
</tr><tr><br />
<td><br />
View %1%<br />
</td><td><br />
Entity type<br />
</td><td><br />
Returns the type of [[Glossary#Entity|entity]] being viewed on the current page (e.g. [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]]); appears as part of the [[Glossary#Page title|page title]] on [[Glossary#View page|view pages]].<br />
</td><br />
</tr><br />
</tbody><br />
</table><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Upload_digital_objects&diff=9422Upload digital objects2010-06-16T04:09:35Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Import/export]] > Upload digital objects<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-6.1_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description view page showing reference display copy of the uploaded image]]<br />
<br />
ICA-AtoM allows the user to upload [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]], such as scanned images, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. Every [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]] must be associated with an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], typically at the file or item level.<br />
<br />
For every object uploaded, ICA-AtoM creates two derivative objects, a [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] image and a [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
At higher [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]], the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] includes [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of all files registered at lower levels. The [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] are displayed using a [[Glossary#Cover-flow|cover-flow]] viewer so you can easily easily scroll through the set using your keyboard's arrow keys.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
To upload a single [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]],<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
# Click on the "Upload digital object" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
# Click the "Browse" button to navigate to and select a file. Click the "Open" button.<br />
# Click the "Save" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]], the [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] will be displayed in the digital object field. Clicking on the image opens up the [[Glossary#Master digital object|master digital object]] (accessible to authenticated users only).<br />
# Objects with multiple pages, such as multi-page TIFFs or PDF files, will be displayed with a pager to allow the user to browse through the pages; all pages will also appear individually as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of the description to which the object was uploaded.<br />
<br />
You can upload any file format, but only supported formats can be viewed or played directly in ICA-AtoM. For a list of formats, see [[file formats]]. Formats that are not supported can still be uploaded: clicking the object will download it to the user's desktop where (assuming the user has the required software) it can be viewed or played.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Upload multiple files ==<br />
<br />
A user can upload multiple files at once, attaching them all to the same [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]].<br />
<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].<br />
# Click on the "Import digital objects" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]].<br />
# Select a title for the objects; all the objects will have the title plus a number. Currently the default is image 01, image 02, etc.<br />
# Choose a level of description.<br />
# Click the blue "Select files" link and select multiple files to upload. The page will show previews of all the objects.<br />
# If you like you can edit the title for each object next to the preview.<br />
# Click Import in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] you will see that the objects have all been attached to the archival description as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of that description.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablkohttps://wiki.ica-atom.org/index.php?title=Upload_digital_objects&diff=9421Upload digital objects2010-06-16T04:07:31Z<p>Jablko: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[Main Page]] > [[User manual]] > [[Import/export]] > Upload digital objects<br />
<br />
<br />
[[Image:UM-6.1_2.png|500px|right|thumb|Archival description view page showing reference display copy of the uploaded image]]<br />
ICA-AtoM allows the user to upload [[Glossary#Digital object|digital objects]], such as scanned images, sound and moving image files, and other scanned or born-digital items. Every [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]] must be associated with an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]], typically at the file or item level.<br />
<br />
For every object uploaded, ICA-AtoM creates two derivative objects, a [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnail]] image and a [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]].<br />
<br />
<div class="note"><br />
<br />
At higher [[Glossary#Level of description|levels of description]], the [[Glossary#Context menu|context menu]] includes [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] of all files registered at lower levels. The [[Glossary#Thumbnail|thumbnails]] are displayed using a [[Glossary#Cover-flow viewer|cover-flow viewer]] so you can easily easily scroll through the set using your keyboard's arrow keys.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
To upload a single [[Glossary#Digital object|digital object]],<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]]<br />
# Click on the "Upload digital object" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]<br />
# Click the "Browse" button to navigate to and select a file. Click the "Open" button.<br />
# Click the "Save" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]], the [[Glossary#Reference display copy|reference display copy]] will be displayed in the digital object field. Clicking on the image opens up the [[Glossary#Master digital object|master digital object]] (accessible to authenticated users only).<br />
# Objects with multiple pages, such as multi-page TIFFs or PDF files, will be displayed with a pager to allow the user to browse through the pages; all pages will also appear individually as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of the description to which the object was uploaded.<br />
<br />
You can upload any file format, but only supported formats can be viewed or played directly in ICA-AtoM. For a list of formats, see [[File formats]]. Formats that are not supported can still be uploaded: clicking the object will download it to the user's desktop where (assuming the user has the required software) it can be viewed or played.<br />
<br />
<br />
== Upload multiple files ==<br />
<br />
A user can upload multiple files at once, attaching them all to the same [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]].<br />
<br />
# Open an [[Glossary#Archival description|archival description]] in [[Glossary#View mode|view mode]].<br />
# Click on the "Import digital objects" button in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]].<br />
# Select a title for the objects; all the objects will have the title plus a number. Currently the default is image 01, image 02, etc.<br />
# Choose a level of description.<br />
# Click the blue "Select files" link and select multiple files to upload. The page will show previews of all the objects.<br />
# If you like you can edit the title for each object next to the preview.<br />
# Click Import in the [[Glossary#Button block|button block]]. When you return to the [[Glossary#View page|view page]] you will see that the objects have all been attached to the archival description as [[Glossary#Child record|child records]] of that description.<br />
<br />
[[Category:User manual]]</div>Jablko